WO2021168804A1 - Image processing method, image processing apparatus and image processing system - Google Patents

Image processing method, image processing apparatus and image processing system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021168804A1
WO2021168804A1 PCT/CN2020/077217 CN2020077217W WO2021168804A1 WO 2021168804 A1 WO2021168804 A1 WO 2021168804A1 CN 2020077217 W CN2020077217 W CN 2020077217W WO 2021168804 A1 WO2021168804 A1 WO 2021168804A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
area
image
focal length
processed
viewing angle
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/077217
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
邹文
彭亮
丁硕
夏斌强
Original Assignee
深圳市大疆创新科技有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 深圳市大疆创新科技有限公司 filed Critical 深圳市大疆创新科技有限公司
Priority to CN202080004280.7A priority Critical patent/CN112514366A/en
Priority to PCT/CN2020/077217 priority patent/WO2021168804A1/en
Publication of WO2021168804A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021168804A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • H04N23/60Control of cameras or camera modules
    • H04N23/695Control of camera direction for changing a field of view, e.g. pan, tilt or based on tracking of objects
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • H04N23/60Control of cameras or camera modules
    • H04N23/67Focus control based on electronic image sensor signals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • H04N23/80Camera processing pipelines; Components thereof

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to the field of image processing technology, and in particular to an image processing method, an image processing device, and an image processing system.
  • the embodiments of the present disclosure provide an image processing method, an image processing device, and an image processing system, which can determine the shooting range of a combined lens with multiple focal lengths at multiple focal lengths through specific application software, so as to facilitate users Understand the range of shooting under the specified focal length to improve user experience.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure provides an image processing method, the method includes: obtaining a first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to a first focal length at a current attitude angle, and obtaining a second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to a second focal length ; Compare the first maximum viewing angle area with the second maximum viewing angle area; and determine the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result, so as to obtain at least one second of the area to be processed under the second focal length Image, the first image is acquired at the first focal length; wherein the second focal length is greater than the first focal length.
  • the angle of view area corresponding to the first focal length is different from the angle of view area corresponding to the second focal length, for example, when the posture of the camera is adjusted by the posture adjustment device, the maximum posture adjustment range of the camera is affected by the mechanical of the posture adjustment device. Due to the influence of the structure and the like, the second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length may not completely include the first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length under the current attitude angle. Also, because the user is not clear about which areas in the first maximum viewing angle area overlap with the second maximum viewing angle area, that is, the user is not clear about which areas in the first image can be photographed with the second focal length to obtain a clearer partial image.
  • the image processing method can compare the first maximum angle of view area corresponding to the first focal length and the second maximum angle of view area corresponding to the second focal length under the current attitude angle to determine whether the area to be processed is in The selectable range in the first image corresponding to the first maximum viewing angle area, so as to obtain at least one second image of the area to be processed at the second focal length.
  • determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image not only allows the user to clarify which areas in the first image can be photographed with the second focal length to obtain a clearer partial image, but also can be limited by the selectable range Measures such as user operation and adjustment range of the attitude adjustment device reduce the possibility of damage to the attitude adjustment device.
  • embodiments of the present disclosure provide an image processing device, which includes: one or more processors; and a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium is used to store one or more computer programs.
  • the computer program When the computer program is executed by the processor, it realizes: obtain the first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length under the current attitude angle, and obtain the second focal length The corresponding second largest viewing angle area; comparing the first largest viewing angle area with the second largest viewing angle area; and determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result, so as to obtain the area to be processed in the second At least one second image at the focal length, the first image is acquired at the first focal length; wherein the second focal length is greater than the first focal length.
  • the image processing device provided by the embodiment of the present disclosure can automatically determine the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image, thereby facilitating the user to determine the area in the first image that can be photographed with the second focal length, so as to obtain a clearer part
  • the image helps to improve the user experience and helps reduce the possibility of damage to the posture adjustment device.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure provides an image processing system.
  • the image processing system includes a photographing device and a control terminal communicatively connected to the photographing device.
  • the control device is used to obtain the area to be processed, and the photographing device is used to obtain the photographing device.
  • the first maximum angle of view area corresponding to the first focal length under the current attitude angle, and the second maximum angle of view area corresponding to the second focal length is obtained; the first maximum angle of view area and the second maximum angle of view area are compared; and according to the comparison result Determine the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image, so as to control the photographing device to acquire at least one second image of the area to be processed at the second focal length.
  • the first image is acquired at the first focal length, where the second The focal length is greater than the first focal length.
  • the photographing device can automatically determine the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image, thereby facilitating the user to determine the photographable area in the first image that can be photographed with the second focal length, so that The user controls the photographing device to obtain a clearer partial image of the photographable area at the second focal length, which helps to improve the user experience and helps reduce the possibility of damage to the posture adjustment device.
  • embodiments of the present disclosure provide a computer-readable storage medium that stores executable instructions that, when executed by one or more processors, can cause one or more processors to execute the above Methods.
  • FIG. 1 is an application scenario of an image processing method, image processing device, and image processing system provided by embodiments of the disclosure
  • FIG 2 is an application scenario of an image processing method, image processing device, and image processing system provided by another embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of an image processing method provided by an embodiment of the disclosure.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a vertical range of a second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to a second focal length provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • 5 to 10 are schematic diagrams of the display interface of the control terminal provided by the embodiments of the disclosure.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of the division of to-be-processed areas provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of an area to be photographed according to an embodiment of the disclosure.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram when the number of shots provided by an embodiment of the disclosure is an odd number
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of an image processing device provided by an embodiment of the disclosure.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of an image processing system provided by an embodiment of the disclosure.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a control terminal provided by an embodiment of the disclosure.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a photographing device provided by an embodiment of the disclosure.
  • Fig. 1 is an application scenario of an image processing method, an image processing device, and an image processing system provided by embodiments of the disclosure.
  • the UAV 10 can rotate around up to three orthogonal axes, such as a first pitch axis (X1), a first heading axis (Y1), and a first roll axis (Z1).
  • Rotating around three axes can refer to pitch rotation, heading rotation and roll rotation.
  • the angular velocity of the UAV 10 around the first pitch axis, the first yaw axis, and the first roll axis can be expressed as ⁇ X1, ⁇ Y1, and ⁇ Z1.
  • the unmanned aerial vehicle 10 can perform movement in translation along a first pitch axis, a first yaw axis, and a first roll axis.
  • the linear velocity of the unmanned aerial vehicle 10 along the first pitch axis, the first yaw axis, and the first roll axis can be denoted as VX1, VY1, and VZ1, respectively.
  • the unmanned aerial vehicle 10 is only an exemplary description of the application scenario, and cannot be understood as a limitation on the application scenario of the present disclosure.
  • the present disclosure can also be applied to a variety of movable platforms.
  • the movable platform may also be a pan-tilt cart, a handheld pan-tilt, a robot, etc., these movable platforms can rotate around one axis or two axes, or cannot rotate around an axis.
  • the imaging device 20 is mounted on the unmanned aerial vehicle 10 via a carrier.
  • the carrier can make the imaging device 20 move around and/or along up to three orthogonal axes (in other embodiments, non-orthogonal axes) relative to the UAV 10, such as the second pitch axis (X2 ), the second yaw axis (Y2) and the second roll axis (Z2) move.
  • the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis may be parallel to the first pitch axis, the first yaw axis, and the first roll axis, respectively.
  • the load is an imaging device including an optical module
  • the second roll axis may be substantially parallel to the optical path and the optical axis of the optical module.
  • the optical module can be connected with an image sensor to capture images.
  • the carrier can send a control signal according to an actuator connected to the carrier, such as a motor, so that the carrier can rotate around up to three orthogonal axes, such as the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis. . Rotation around the three axes can be referred to as pitch rotation, heading rotation and roll rotation.
  • the angular velocity of the camera 20 around the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis can be expressed as ⁇ X2, ⁇ Y2, and ⁇ Z2, respectively.
  • the carrier can make the imaging device 20 move relative to the UAV 10 along the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis.
  • the linear velocity of the camera 20 along the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis can be denoted as VX2, VY2, VZ2, respectively.
  • the carrier may only allow the camera 20 to rotate relative to the UAV 10 about a subset of the three axes (the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis).
  • the carrier may only allow the camera 20 to rotate around the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis or a combination of any of them, but not allow the camera 20 to move in translation along any axis.
  • the carrier may allow the camera 20 to rotate around only one of the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis.
  • the carrier may allow the camera 20 to rotate around only two of the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis.
  • the carrier may allow the camera device 20 to rotate around the three axes of the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis.
  • the carrier may only allow the camera 20 to move along the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis or a combined translational movement of any of them, but not allow the camera 20 to move around. Any axis rotation movement.
  • the carrier may allow the camera 20 to move along only one of the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis.
  • the carrier may allow the camera 20 to move along only two of the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis.
  • the carrier may allow the camera 20 to move along the three axes of the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis.
  • the carrier may allow the camera 20 to perform rotational and translational motions relative to the UAV 10.
  • the carrier may allow the camera 20 to move along and/or around one, two, or three of the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis.
  • the imaging device 20 may be directly mounted on the UAV 10 without a carrier, or the carrier does not allow the imaging device 20 to move relative to the UAV 10. In this case, the posture, position, and/or direction of the photographing device 20 are fixed relative to the unmanned aerial vehicle 10.
  • the adjustment of the posture, direction and/or position of the photographing device 20 may be achieved individually or collectively by appropriate adjustments to the UAV 10, the carrier and/or the photographing device 20.
  • the camera 20 can be rotated 80 degrees around a designated axis (such as a heading axis) by the following method: the UAV 10 rotates 80 degrees alone, the load is rotated 80 degrees relative to the UAV 10 through actuation of the carrier, and no The human aircraft 10 rotates 50 degrees while the load rotates 30 degrees relative to the unmanned aircraft 10.
  • the translational movement of other loads can be achieved by proper adjustment of the UAV 10 and the carrier.
  • the adjustment of the operating parameters of the load can also be completed by one or more of the UAV 10, the carrier, or the control terminal of the UAV 10.
  • the operating parameters of the load may include, for example, the zoom degree or the focal length of the imaging device.
  • the unmanned aerial vehicle 10 may include an unmanned aerial vehicle
  • the photographing device 20 may include an imaging device.
  • the control terminal 30 may also be included in the application scenario.
  • the movable platform can be an aircraft (such as an unmanned aerial vehicle), a pan-tilt cart, a handheld pan-tilt, a robot, and so on.
  • the control terminal 30 may be a device such as a mobile phone or a tablet computer, and may also have a remote control function to realize remote control of a movable platform such as the unmanned aerial vehicle 10.
  • the unmanned aerial vehicle 10 may include an attitude adjustment device (such as the carrier described above) such as a pan/tilt, and the imaging device 20 may be mounted on the pan/tilt.
  • the photographing device 20 may include a first lens and a second lens for performing different photographing tasks.
  • the photographing device 20 may also include two or more.
  • the first lens and the second lens are located at Different camera devices.
  • the first lens and the second lens may be lenses corresponding to the conventional shooting function of the camera.
  • the first lens and the second lens may be a wide-angle lens and a zoom lens, respectively.
  • a wide-angle lens can be used to obtain a wider and complete picture
  • a zoom lens can be used to obtain high-definition details
  • a pan-tilt can be used to adjust the shooting angle of the camera 20
  • the UAV 10 can be used to ensure smooth movement and no drift.
  • the control terminal 30 can be used to control the movement of the unmanned aerial vehicle 10.
  • the control terminal 30 can also obtain the shooting screen returned by the shooting device 20 for the user to view.
  • control terminal 30 can also obtain a user's control instruction on the photographing device 20, and send the control instruction to the photographing device.
  • the control instruction may be, for example, an instruction to control the zoom factor of the zoom lens 30 of the photographing device 20, or may be an instruction to control the photographing range of the zoom lens of the photographing device 20, or the like.
  • the unmanned aerial vehicle 10 may include various types of UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle, unmanned aerial vehicle), such as a quadrotor UAV, a hexarotor UAV, and the like.
  • UAV Unmanned Aerial Vehicle, unmanned aerial vehicle
  • the gimbal included can be a three-axis gimbal, that is, the attitude of the gimbal can be controlled on the three axes of the pitch axis, roll axis, and yaw axis, so as to determine the corresponding attitude of the gimbal so that it can be mounted on
  • the photographing device 20 on the pan/tilt can complete corresponding photographing tasks.
  • the unmanned aerial vehicle 10 may establish a communication connection with the above-mentioned control terminal 30 through a wireless connection method (for example, a wireless connection method based on WiFi or radio frequency communication, etc.).
  • the control terminal 30 may be a controller with a joystick and a display screen, and the UAV 10 is controlled by the amount of the stick.
  • the control terminal 30 can also be a smart device such as a smart phone or a tablet computer. It can control the unmanned aerial vehicle 10 to fly automatically by configuring the flight trajectory on the user interface UI, or control the unmanned aerial vehicle 10 to fly automatically by means of body sensing, or through After the flight trajectory is recorded during the flight of the UAV 10 in advance, the UAV 1 is controlled to automatically fly along the recorded flight trajectory.
  • the photographing device 20 may also establish a communication connection with the above-mentioned control terminal 30 through a wireless connection method (for example, a wireless connection method based on WiFi or radio frequency communication, etc.).
  • a wireless connection method for example, a wireless connection method based on WiFi or radio frequency communication, etc.
  • the photographing device 20 establishes a wireless communication connection with the aforementioned control terminal 30 through a wireless communication module of a movable platform.
  • the photographing device 20 may establish a communication connection with the aforementioned control terminal 30 by itself, wherein, in some embodiments, the photographing device 20 is an independent photographing device, such as a sports camera.
  • the control terminal 30 can install application software for controlling the shooting device 20, and the user can view the shooting screen returned by the shooting device on the display interface of the control terminal 30 through the application software, and provide the user with the interaction between the control terminal 30 and the shooting device 20 interface.
  • the imaging device 20 includes charge-coupled devices (CCD), and uses complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS), or N-type metal-oxide-semiconductor (N-type metal-semiconductor). oxide-semiconductor, NMOS, Live MOS), or other types of sensors.
  • the sensor may be a part of the imaging equipment (such as a camera) carried by the unmanned aerial vehicle.
  • the imaging equipment may be carried on the unmanned aerial vehicle through a pan/tilt, which can adjust the attitude angle of the photographing device 20.
  • the image data captured by the camera 20 can be stored in a data storage device.
  • the data storage device may be based on semiconductor, magnetic, optical or any suitable technology, and the data storage device may include flash memory, USB drive, memory card, solid state drive, hard disk drive, floppy disk, optical disk, magnetic disk, etc.
  • data storage devices include removable storage devices that can be detachably connected to imaging devices, such as memory cards of any suitable format, such as personal computer cards, micro flash memory cards, SM cards, and Memory Stick Memory Stick, Memory Stick Duo Memory Stick, Memory Stick PRO Duo Memory Stick, Mini Memory Card, Multimedia Memory Card, Micro Multimedia Memory Card, MMCmicro Card, PS2 Card, SD Card, SxS Memory Card, UFS Card, Micro SD Card, MicroSD card, xD card, iStick card, serial flash memory module, NT card, XQD card, etc.
  • the data storage device may also include an external hard disk drive, optical disk drive, magnetic disk drive, floppy disk drive, or any other suitable storage device connected to the imaging device.
  • the image captured by the camera 20 can be transmitted to the control terminal 30 through the wireless communication module.
  • the image data may be compressed or subjected to other processing before being transmitted by the wireless communication module. In other embodiments, the image data may not undergo compression or other processing before transmission.
  • the transmitted image data can be displayed on the control terminal 30 so that the user who operates the user terminal can see the image data and/or interact with the control terminal 30 based on the image data.
  • the photographing device 20 may preprocess the captured image data.
  • hardware In the process of preprocessing the image data, hardware, software or a combination of the two can be used.
  • the hardware may include Field-Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) and so on. Specifically, after the image data is captured, the unprocessed image data can be pre-processed to perform noise removal, contrast enhancement, scale space representation, and the like.
  • FPGA Field-Programmable Gate Array
  • Fig. 2 is an application scenario of an image processing method, image processing device, and image processing system provided by another embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • this scene may include a photographing device 20, a control terminal 30, and a posture adjustment device 40.
  • the posture adjusting device 40 may be a device for adjusting the posture of the photographing device 20, such as a pan/tilt, etc., to adjust the posture of the photographing device 20.
  • the control terminal 30 may be an electronic device such as a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a notebook, a desktop computer, a remote control, etc., to realize remote control of the posture adjustment device 40 and the photographing device 20.
  • the imaging device 20 may be mounted on a posture adjustment device 40 which is a pan/tilt.
  • the photographing device 20 may include a zoom lens to perform photographing tasks.
  • the zoom lens may be a lens corresponding to the conventional shooting function of the camera.
  • a zoom lens can be used to obtain a more complete picture in the environment at a low focal length, and a high focal length of the zoom lens can be used to obtain high-definition details.
  • the movement of the device 20 is smooth and without drift.
  • the control terminal 30 can be used to control the movement of the posture adjustment device 40.
  • the control terminal 30 can also obtain the shooting screen returned by the shooting device 20 for the user to view.
  • the control terminal 30 can also obtain a user's control instruction on the photographing device 20, and send the control instruction to the photographing device.
  • the control instruction may be, for example, an instruction to control the zoom factor of the zoom lens of the photographing device 20, or may be an instruction to control the photographing range of the zoom lens of the photographing device 20, or may be an instruction to view a partially clear photo, or the like.
  • the user may set a monitoring task on the control terminal 30, and the monitoring task may include the task of acquiring images in a specified time period and a specified area using multiple focal lengths. For example, at 9 o'clock in the morning, an image of the scene as shown in FIG. 2 (such as an image acquired at a low focal length), and a partial image of the area where the key monitoring object is located in the image (such as an image acquired at a high focal length) is acquired at 9 o'clock in the morning. In this way, it is convenient for the user to perform state monitoring and the like based on the image acquired by the photographing device 20.
  • the design application is not limited to security scenes.
  • the security scenes are shooting in a fixed range. In addition, they can also be shooting in a moving range, for example, shooting in different scenes through a movable platform.
  • users can use multiple focal lengths to obtain images at the current point in time and in a specific area at any time. For example, when the user finds that there may be an abnormality in the scene as shown in FIG. 2, he can control the photographing device 20 to photograph the area where the abnormality may exist in time for state tracking and the like.
  • the photographing device 20 may also establish a communication connection with the above-mentioned control terminal 30 through a wired connection or a wireless connection (for example, a wireless connection based on WiFi or radio frequency communication, etc.).
  • the control terminal 30 can install application software for controlling the shooting device 20, and the user can view the shooting screen returned by the shooting device on the display interface of the control terminal 30 through the application software, and provide the user with the interaction between the control terminal 30 and the shooting device 20 interface.
  • the photographing device 20 includes an image sensor to capture image information.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of an image processing method provided by an embodiment of the disclosure.
  • the image processing method may include operations S301 to S305.
  • the above operations can be performed on a variety of electronic devices with computing capabilities, for example, can be performed on at least one of an unmanned aerial vehicle, a camera, a pan/tilt, a pan/tilt camera, and a control terminal.
  • the pan/tilt camera refers to the equipment including the pan/tilt and the camera, and the pan/tilt and the camera are connected by a non-quick release.
  • operations S301 to S305 are performed on the pan-tilt camera.
  • operations S301 to S305 are performed on the control terminal.
  • at least part of operations S301 to S305 are performed on the pan-tilt camera, and the rest are performed on the control terminal.
  • different electronic devices can communicate with each other the data required for the operation, user operations, intermediate operation results, and final operation results, etc. .
  • the required data and user operations can be collected by a specific sensor, such as image data collected by an image sensor, and user operations collected by a touch screen.
  • a first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length under the current attitude angle is obtained, and a second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length is obtained.
  • the second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length is determined based on the maximum rotatable angle of the posture adjustment device (such as a pan-tilt).
  • the first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length under the current attitude angle is related to the pose of the camera. Take a camera installed on the drone as an example for illustrative description. The camera is installed on the drone through a pan-tilt, and the attitude of the camera is adjusted through the pan-tilt.
  • the deflection range of the pitch angle of the gimbal in the normal downward installation includes the first range, such as (-90, 30)
  • the deflection range of the yaw angle includes the second range, such as (-300, 300).
  • the maximum adjustable range can be determined by the maximum rotation angle of the pan/tilt.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a vertical range of a second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to a second focal length provided by an embodiment of the disclosure. As shown in FIG. 4, if the deflection range of the pitch angle of the pan/tilt at the second focal length is set to include the first range being (MIN, MAX), it can be determined that the second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length includes: in, Is the vertical size of the viewing area corresponding to the second focal length.
  • setting the deflection range of the pitch angle of the pan/tilt at the first focal length includes the second range (MIN, MAX) (because the camera device corresponding to the first focal length and the camera corresponding to the second focal length can be controlled through the same pan/tilt In the photographing device, the first range and the second range may be the same), it can be determined that the first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length includes: in, Is the vertical size of the viewing area corresponding to the first focal length.
  • the first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length can be expressed as
  • the first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length at the current attitude angle may be the first viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length of the camera at the current attitude angle, and the camera may capture an image of the first viewing angle area at the first focal length .
  • the second focal length includes any of the following: fixed focal length (such as the focal length of a camera with a fixed focal length), preset focal length (such as the focal length specified in the preset shooting task), and the focal length determined based on the focal length algorithm ( For example, determined based on the historical focal length data used by the user), based on the focal length determined by the sensor and the focal length selected by the user (for example, the focal length selection component is displayed on the display interface, and the user clicks the button, slides the focal length selection bar, enters text, etc. Select focal length).
  • the focal length determined based on the sensor includes: the focal length determined based on distance information, and the distance information is determined by a laser rangefinder.
  • a laser rangefinder can be set on a camera, pan/tilt or drone to determine the applicable focal length.
  • the first maximum viewing angle area and the second maximum viewing angle area are compared. For example, comparing whether the first maximum viewing angle area includes the second maximum viewing angle area, or comparing whether the second maximum viewing angle area includes the first maximum viewing angle area. For another example, compare the upper limit of the first maximum angle of view area and the upper limit of the second maximum angle of view area, compare the lower limit of the first maximum angle of view area and the lower limit of the second maximum angle of view area, compare the left limit of the first maximum angle of view area and the second maximum For the left limit of the viewing angle area, compare the right limit of the first maximum viewing angle area and the right limit of the second maximum viewing angle area.
  • the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image is determined according to the comparison result, so as to obtain at least one second image of the area to be processed under the second focal length, the first image being obtained under the first focal length .
  • the second focal length is greater than the first focal length.
  • the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image corresponding to the first maximum viewing angle area may be determined based on the comparison result, and the area in the first image corresponding to the selectable range may be based on the second focal length Take a shot.
  • the first maximum angle of view area corresponding to the first focal length is included in the second maximum angle of view area corresponding to the second focal length, it is determined that the first maximum angle of view area can be photographed based on the second focal length . That is, the upper and lower boundaries of the selectable range are the upper and lower boundaries of the first maximum viewing angle area, and the value of the selectable range is (0.0, 1.0) (for example, the upper boundary of the selectable range and the upper boundary of the first maximum viewing angle area are taken The value ratio is 0% to 100%, and the value ratio of the lower boundary of the selectable range to the lower boundary of the first maximum viewing angle area is 0% to 100%).
  • the upper limit of the selectable range needs to be calculated.
  • the lower limit of the selectable range needs to be calculated.
  • the left limit of the selectable range needs to be calculated.
  • the right limit of the selectable range needs to be calculated.
  • the method in order for the user to intuitively see the relationship between the first maximum angle of view area and the second maximum angle of view area, and then select an appropriate area to be processed, when the method is applied to the control end of the shooting end, it can also The following operations are included to display at least one of the multiple boundaries of the selectable range.
  • one or more boundaries of the selectable range can be displayed in the display interface.
  • the boundary of the area to be processed exceeds the selectable range
  • the boundary of the exceeded selectable range may be displayed on the display interface.
  • the boundary beyond the selectable range among the boundaries of the area to be processed may be displayed on the display interface.
  • the non-selectable range and the selectable range can be displayed differently, such as by transparency or color.
  • FIGS 5 to 10 are schematic diagrams of the display interface of the control terminal provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result may include the following operations. If it is determined according to the comparison result that the second maximum viewing angle area S2 includes the first maximum viewing angle area S1, then determining the area to be processed The selectable range of the area in the first image is any area in the first image.
  • determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result may include the following operations. If it is determined according to the comparison result that the second maximum viewing angle area S2 includes part of the first maximum viewing angle area S1, then determining The selectable range of the processing area in the first image is the overlap area of the first maximum viewing angle area and the second maximum viewing angle area.
  • the shaded area in FIG. 6 is the overlapping area of the first maximum viewing angle area and the second maximum viewing angle area.
  • the current attitude angle is the current pitch angle
  • determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result may include the following operations. If the first upper limit of the first maximum viewing angle area S1 is determined according to the comparison result Beyond the second upper limit of the second maximum viewing angle area S2, based on the first upper limit, the second upper limit, and the vertical viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length, the selectable range is determined to be the upper limit (upper boundary) of the first maximum viewing angle area. ).
  • the current attitude angle is the current pitch angle
  • determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result may include the following operations. If it is determined according to the comparison result that the second lower limit of the second maximum viewing angle area exceeds The first lower limit of the first maximum viewing angle area, based on the second lower limit, the first lower limit, and the vertical viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length, determine the selectable lower limit (lower boundary) of the selectable range in the first maximum viewing angle area .
  • the current attitude angle is the current yaw angle
  • determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result may include the following operations. If the limit exceeds the second left limit of the second maximum angle of view area, based on the first left limit, the second left limit and the horizontal angle of view area corresponding to the first focal length, the selectable range is determined to be the selectable left limit of the first maximum angle of view area. limit.
  • the algorithm for the left limit (optional left limit) of the selectable range can refer to the algorithm for calculating the lower limit of the selectable range.
  • Replace with the horizontal size of the field of view corresponding to the first focal length will Replaced with the horizontal size of the viewing area corresponding to the second focal length That's it.
  • the current attitude angle is the current yaw angle
  • determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result may include the following operations. If the limit exceeds the first right limit of the first maximum viewing angle area, based on the second right limit, the first right limit, and the horizontal viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length, determine the selectable range in the first maximum viewing angle area. Right limit.
  • the algorithm for the right limit of the selectable range can refer to the above-mentioned algorithm for calculating the upper limit of the selectable range.
  • Replace with the horizontal size of the field of view corresponding to the first focal length will Replaced with the horizontal size of the viewing area corresponding to the second focal length That's it.
  • the method may further include the following operations.
  • the second largest viewing angle area includes the area to be processed.
  • the to-be-processed area input by the user may be received at the control terminal, or the to-be-processed area may be determined based on the image recognition algorithm at the photographing device or the control terminal.
  • the area to be processed should be included in the second maximum viewing angle area to avoid multiple second images obtained by taking pictures of the area to be processed under the second focal length, which cannot cover the complete image of the area to be processed (such as after stitching) Form a "m" font image).
  • the area to be processed is determined by way of user input as an example for description.
  • the control terminal or camera device the control terminal sends the area to be processed by the user to the camera device
  • the area to be processed may be a frame-like area input by the user from the display interface of the control terminal, an area formed by multiple coordinates input by the user, or an area formed by multiple points input by the user.
  • the method may further include the following operations.
  • the control terminal or camera device can obtain the candidate to-be-processed area (such as the person image area, the scenic spot image area, etc. obtained through the algorithm, or the key monitoring area determined according to the preset task, etc.), and accordingly, determine the to-be-processed area Including: if it is determined that the candidate to-be-processed area does not exceed the selectable range, then the candidate to-be-processed area is determined to be the to-be-processed area.
  • the candidate to-be-processed area such as the person image area, the scenic spot image area, etc. obtained through the algorithm, or the key monitoring area determined according to the preset task, etc.
  • a prompt message may be output on the control terminal.
  • the selectable range is displayed as the prompt information on the display interface of the control terminal.
  • the method may further include: if it is determined that the candidate to-be-processed area is beyond the selectable range, outputting prompt information at the control terminal. For example, when the candidate to-be-processed area input by the user exceeds the selectable range, prompt information is output on the control terminal.
  • the prompt information includes but is not limited to: image information, text information, sound information, and somatosensory information, such as when the candidate to-be-processed area
  • the lower limit of the selectable range exceeds the lower limit of the selectable range
  • the lower limit of the selectable range is displayed on the display interface of the control terminal.
  • the selectable range is displayed on the display interface of the control terminal, other areas on the first image in the display interface other than the selectable range cannot be selected, that is, the user is restricted to only select within the selectable range. That is, in this case, the obtained candidate to-be-processed area is the to-be-processed area, and there is no need to further determine whether the candidate to-be-processed area exceeds the selectable range.
  • the determination of the area to be processed based on the image recognition algorithm is taken as an example.
  • the determination of the area to be processed based on the image recognition algorithm may include: As the area to be processed.
  • suitable image recognition technologies can be used in the above-mentioned image recognition process, such as CAD-like object recognition methods (edge detection, primal sketch), and appearance (apprearance-based) recognition methods (such as edge matching, divide-conquer search algorithm, grayscale matching, gradient matching, historgrams) of receptive field response, or large model (1arge model bases, etc.), feature-based recognition methods (such as interpretation tree, hypothesizing-testing), pose consistency ), pose clustering, invariance, geometric hashing, scale-invariant feature transform (SIFT), based on fast and robust features (speeded up robust) feature, SURF), genetic algorithms (genetic algorithms), etc.
  • CAD-like object recognition methods edge detection, primal sketch
  • appearance (apprearance-based) recognition methods such as edge matching, divide
  • the area to be processed is determined based on a preset task and an image recognition algorithm as an example for description.
  • the user can set a preset task through the control terminal in advance, such as an image collection task based on a preset period.
  • the preset task can include a variety of task parameters, such as task period, shooting pose sequence information (the shooting pose sequence information can be input by the user, or it can be automatically controlled by the control terminal according to the key monitoring area and focal length information input by the user.
  • alarm-related information may include the number of photos taken and the pose information of each shot, focal length information, sensitivity information, shutter information, and the like.
  • Alarm related information includes but is not limited to: alarm trigger conditions, alarm mode, etc.
  • the recognition result of the recognition by the image recognition algorithm is compared with the alarm triggering conditions to determine whether to alarm. For example, if it is determined that there are flammable and explosive items in a certain location monitored through image recognition, an alarm is required.
  • monitored objects such as meters and fasteners are usually fixed at designated locations, and the status information of the monitored object is determined based on preset tasks and image recognition algorithms, and then whether the monitored object is determined based on the status information of the monitored object Make an alarm.
  • the photographing related information is determined based on the second focal length and the to-be-processed area, so as to acquire at least one second image of the to-be-processed area at the second focal length based on the photographing-related information.
  • the photographing related information may include: photographing pose sequence information, camera photographing related information, camera type information, and the like.
  • the shooting pose sequence information may include posture adjustment device associated information.
  • the associated information of the attitude adjustment device includes but is not limited to at least one of the following: attitude angle sequence information, time sequence information, and the like.
  • Camera shooting related information includes but is not limited to at least one of the following: exposure duration sequence information, sensitivity sequence information, denoising mode sequence information, output format sequence information, compression mode sequence information, etc. (It should be noted that the camera shooting related information
  • Each sequence information may also be a single value, for example, the shooting parameters for shooting under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information are the same).
  • the shooting pose sequence information is determined based on the shooting combination information, and the shooting combination information is determined based on the second focal length and the area to be processed.
  • the photographing combination information may include: the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph.
  • determining the photographing associated information based on the second focal length and the area to be processed includes: determining the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph based on the second focal length and the area to be processed.
  • each shooting pose in the shooting pose sequence information corresponds to a to-be-photographed area, so that under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information, a second image corresponding to the to-be-photographed area is captured at the second focal length.
  • determining the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph may include the following operations. First, the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length is determined based on the size of the image sensor and the second focal length. Then, the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph are determined based on the area to be processed and the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length. Among them, the area formed by multiple areas to be photographed includes the area to be processed.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of the division of a to-be-processed area provided by an embodiment of the disclosure.
  • the size of the camera's image sensor is fixed. Under the second focal length in a specific posture (the size of the image obtained under the long focal length is smaller than the size of the image obtained under the short focal length), the image sensor can capture
  • the size of the image on the display interface is: width W1, length L1.
  • the size of the area to be processed on the display interface is: width W2, length L2.
  • the area to be processed can be divided into: Regions, of which, Indicates rounding up. In this way, the number of photographs that need to be taken can be determined, so that the multiple second images taken at the second focal length can completely cover the image of the area to be processed in the first image taken at the first focal length.
  • each divided area can be used as an area to be photographed.
  • a certain redundant area may be set for the area to be photographed. For example, determining the number of photos taken based on the area to be processed and the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length, and the area to be photographed for each photo may include: based on the area to be processed, the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length and the area to be photographed.
  • the image overlap ratio determines the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph. Wherein, the image overlap ratio may be a preset value, the image overlap ratio may be for one or more side lengths (for example, including at least one of the width overlap ratio and the length overlap ratio), or it may be for area (for example, Area overlap ratio).
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of an area to be photographed according to an embodiment of the disclosure.
  • the illustrated area to be processed is divided into 9 areas to be photographed, and there is a specific image overlap ratio between adjacent areas to be photographed. Since the horizontal length and the vertical length of the area to be photographed can be different, the horizontal image overlap ratio (overlap x ) and the vertical image overlap ratio (overlap y ) can be set. Of course, the same image overlap ratio can also be set for the horizontal and vertical directions of the area to be photographed. In other embodiments, if the area to be photographed is a square, an image overlap ratio with the same horizontal and vertical overlap ratio can be set.
  • a camera with two lens groups is used as an example for description. If the first focal length is used for focusing by the first lens group, the second focal length is used for focusing by the second lens group.
  • the baseline deviation always exists, and the baseline deviation needs to be corrected, and the optical axis of the second lens group needs to be aligned with the optical axis of the original first lens by adjusting the posture adjustment device to take an image of a designated area.
  • determining the photographing pose sequence information based on the area to be photographed may include: determining the photographing pose corresponding to the area to be photographed for each photograph based on the current pose of the camera at the first focal length and the angular position deviation of the second focal length, and The set of all the determined shooting poses is used as the shooting pose sequence information.
  • determining the shooting pose sequence information based on the area to be photographed may include: based on the current pose of the camera at the first focal length, the angular position deviation of the second focal length, and the image overlap between the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length and the area to be photographed The ratio determines the shooting pose corresponding to the area to be photographed for each shot, and the set of all the determined shooting poses is used as the shooting pose sequence information.
  • the deviation of the second focal length angle position may be determined based on the first deviation, the second deviation, and the third deviation. Specifically, the first deviation between the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length is determined, for example, the designated position may be the center point. The second deviation between the designated position of the area to be processed and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length is determined. Determine the third deviation between the designated position of the area to be photographed and the designated position of the area to be processed.
  • the second focal length angular position deviation between the area to be photographed and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length can be determined based on the first deviation, the second deviation, and the third deviation.
  • the pan-tilt so that the camera deviates from the current attitude angle of the above-mentioned second focal length angle position deviation, it is possible to take pictures of the area to be photographed.
  • the horizontal angle of view (fov zx ) corresponding to the second focal length and the size corresponding to the second focal length are calculated using formulas (1) and (2).
  • W and H are the width and height of the sensor, and focal_length is the second focal length.
  • the horizontal angle of view at the first focal length corresponding to the area to be processed is (fov wx ), and the angle of view at the first focal length corresponding to the area to be processed
  • the vertical viewing angle of the area is (fov wy )
  • the conditions shown in equations (3) and (4) can be satisfied .
  • overlap x is the image overlap ratio in the horizontal direction
  • overlap y is the image overlap ratio in the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. 12, that is, the length overlap ratio and the width overlap ratio.
  • m and n are the number of photos that need to be taken horizontally and vertically respectively.
  • overlap x can be specified by the user or calculated by an algorithm through special rules.
  • the internal parameters, rotation matrix and translation matrix between the first lens group and the second lens group can be calibrated to calculate the specific target distance (in general, it is assumed to be infinity). Then, calculate the first deviation from the center of the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length to the center of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length. Specifically, it can be as shown in formula (5) to formula (7).
  • the center of the area to be processed can be calculated relative to the view area corresponding to the first focal length
  • the second deviation (offset_2 x , offset_2 y ) of the center of can be specifically expressed by equations (8) and (9).
  • the third deviation (offset_3 x , offset_3 y ) of the first area to be photographed in the upper left corner relative to the center of the area to be processed can be calculated.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram when the number of shots provided by an embodiment of the disclosure is an odd number
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram when the number of shots provided by an embodiment of the disclosure is an even number.
  • the third deviation (offset_3 x , offset_3 y ) can be calculated using equations (10) and (11).
  • fov x -overlap x is the horizontal viewing angle after removing the overlap
  • fov y -overlap y is the vertical viewing angle after removing the overlap
  • the current pose may refer to the current shooting pose angle of the camera.
  • the PTZ can be controlled to adjust the posture of the camera based on the angular position deviation, so that the camera can take a picture of the area to be photographed in the upper left corner of the m*n areas to be photographed under the second focal length.
  • the angular position deviation of the area to be photographed in the upper left corner with respect to the first lens group in the current pose can be determined by formulas (12) and (13).
  • offset x offset_1 x +offset_2 x +offset_3 x formula (12)
  • the first focal length is realized by a wide-angle camera (including the first lens group), and the second focal length is realized by a telephoto camera (including the second lens group).
  • the current wide-angle camera position is (yaw current , pitch current )
  • the position corresponding to the area to be photographed in the upper left corner of the wide-angle camera is (yaw target (1, 1), pitch target (1, 1)), which can be obtained by (14) and formula (15) for calculation.
  • pitch target (1, 1) pitch current + offset y formula (15)
  • yaw target (m,n) yaw target (1,1)+(1-overlap x )*fov zx *(m-1)
  • pitch target (m, n) pitch target (1, 1) + (1-overlap y )*fov zy *(n-1)
  • the angular position deviation of each area to be photographed relative to the current posture of the camera can be determined, and the photographing pose sequence information can be obtained.
  • the method may further include the following operations: controlling the shooting end to shoot at the second focal length under each shooting pose in the shooting pose sequence information.
  • the second image corresponding to the photographing area can be performed by the control terminal or by the camera terminal.
  • the control terminal may send a shooting instruction to the shooting terminal.
  • the shooting end automatically performs shooting based on the shooting pose sequence information, which is not limited here.
  • the shooting end includes a shooting device, and controlling the shooting end to shoot the second image corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information may include the following operations: controlling the shooting device through the attitude adjustment device In each shooting pose in the shooting pose sequence information, the shooting device is controlled to shoot the second images respectively corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length in each shooting pose.
  • the attitude adjustment device is set on a movable platform, the attitude adjustment device can be a multi-axis pan/tilt, and the movable platform can be an unmanned aerial vehicle.
  • the first image and the second image are captured by a zoom camera at the first focal length and the second focal length, respectively.
  • the camera has a zoom lens
  • the first image and the second image are obtained by adjusting the focal length of the zoom lens and adjusting the posture of the camera.
  • the first image is taken by a first photographing device
  • the second image is taken by a second photographing device.
  • the focal length of the first photographing device is at least partially different from the focal length of the second photographing device.
  • the first photographing device and the second photographing device are two independent photographing devices, which can be set on the same pan-tilt, so that the first photographing device and the second photographing device can move synchronously.
  • the distance between the first camera and the second camera is fixed, and the first camera is set on the first platform, the second camera is set on the second platform, and the first camera and the second camera are The pan/tilt can move synchronously.
  • the first imaging device and the second imaging device are packaged in a housing and share an image sensor, and the optical axis of the lens group of the first imaging device and the optical axis of the lens group of the second imaging device are kept parallel.
  • the focal length of at least one of the first camera and the second camera is adjustable.
  • the first photographing device is a fixed focal length camera
  • the second photographing device is an adjustable focal length camera.
  • the first imaging device is an adjustable focal length camera
  • the second imaging device is a fixed focal length camera.
  • both the first imaging device and the second imaging device are cameras with adjustable focal lengths. Using two shooting devices for shooting is compared to using a shooting device with an adjustable focal length (such as a high-power zoom lens with a larger focal length adjustment range).
  • the first photographing device is a wide-angle camera
  • the second photographing device is a telephoto camera.
  • the telephoto camera may be a camera with an adjustable focal length.
  • the adjustable focal length range of the telephoto camera can be determined according to the cost of the camera and so on.
  • the adjustable focus range of the telephoto camera may be smaller than the adjustable focus range of the above-mentioned high-power zoom lens.
  • the adjustable focal length range of a telephoto camera is located on the larger focal length side of the adjustable focal range of a high-power zoom lens.
  • first photographing device described above may include a first lens group
  • second photographing device may include a second lens group
  • the method also It may include the following operations: storing the first image and the second image in association.
  • the SD card stores the HTML file and the first image and the second image, so that the SD card is coupled to the personal computer (PC) side, and the first image and the second image can be displayed on the PC side based on the HTML file.
  • the HTML file may include the mapping relationship between the first image and the second image.
  • storing the first image and the second image in association may include the following operations. First, determine the first mapping relationship between the second image and the area to be processed, and determine the second mapping relationship between the area to be processed and the first image. Then, the first image, the area to be processed, the second image, the first mapping relationship, and the second mapping relationship are stored. Among them, the area to be processed may be expressed as range information, etc., such as a range determined based on multiple coordinates.
  • the second image when applied to the shooting terminal, is an unprocessed shooting image.
  • the second image is the original captured image.
  • the original captured image may undergo pre-processing such as noise reduction, object recognition, and recognition of object region marking.
  • the second image when applied to the control terminal of the shooting terminal, the second image is a processed captured image, and the resolution of the second image is smaller than the resolution of the unprocessed captured image.
  • image compression may be performed on the second image to reduce the storage occupied by the second image.
  • the network resources occupied by the transmission of the second image can be reduced.
  • the drone side transmits a thumbnail of the second image.
  • the control terminal needs to consult the specific second image, it needs to be downloaded from the drone side. After the transmission is compressed
  • the second image is helpful to reduce network resource consumption, and helps to improve the transmission rate and user command response speed.
  • the process of image compression on the second image may occur after the second image is captured, after receiving a user instruction for viewing the second image, or after receiving a user for compressing the second image After the instruction, there is no restriction here.
  • the zoom lens can obtain the shooting image according to the new zoom factor (for example, when the user changes the second focal length by adjusting the magnification adjustment component in the display interface of the control terminal), the camera device can real-time capture the shots acquired by the zoom lens
  • the picture is sent to the control terminal, so that the control terminal displays the picture obtained by the zoom lens, so that the user can intuitively check whether the sharpness of the picture obtained by the zoom lens meets their own needs.
  • the above method may further include the following operation: if an operation instruction for viewing the second image is received, obtaining an unprocessed photographed image corresponding to the second image from the photographing terminal. Then, the unprocessed captured image corresponding to the second image is displayed.
  • the drone side may send the compressed image of the second image to the control terminal side for display. If the user wants to view the original photographed image of the second image, he can send an operation instruction for viewing the second image to the side of the drone (or the photographing device on it) through the control terminal side.
  • the drone side In response to the operation instruction for viewing the second image, the drone side sends the original captured image of the second image to the control terminal side. In this way, the information interaction speed between the control terminal side and the drone side can be satisfied at the same time, and the multiple needs of the user for the second image can also be met.
  • the control camera is used to shoot at the second focal length and the area to be photographed (which may include multiple areas to be photographed) under each shooting position of the shooting position sequence.
  • the method may further include the following operations. First, a third image is acquired, which is synthesized based on the second image. Then, the first image and the third image are stored in association. Wherein, the third image may be synthesized using multiple second images, for example, based on image stitching technology. For the overlapping image parts between the multiple second images that are stitched, interpolation can be used to make the stitching more natural.
  • the first image is captured through the wide-angle lens and the second image is captured through the telephoto lens, combined with the display interface of the control terminal, to illustrate the viewing of the photographing result.
  • Figures 15-17 are schematic diagrams of display images provided by embodiments of the disclosure.
  • the content displayed on the display interface 1501 of the control terminal includes: the first image captured at the first focal length under the current posture of the first camera.
  • the user selects the area to be processed 1502 (included in the second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length) from the first image, and sets the second focal length.
  • the photographing terminal or the controlling terminal divides the area to be processed 1502 based on the second focal length, determines four areas to be photographed, and determines photographing related information of the four areas to be photographed. In this way, the shooting end can respectively take pictures of the four areas to be photographed at the second focal length based on the photographing related information, so as to obtain four super-analyzed second images.
  • the first image and the second image can be associated and stored, such as stored in an SD card.
  • the display interface 1501 further includes a focal length adjustment component 1503, focal length information, etc., so that the user can adjust the second focal length.
  • the current second focal length (ZOOM) is 10 times the focal length.
  • the display interface 1501 may also include the number of shots and/or the shooting duration of the zoom lens. The shooting information changes as the shooting parameters of the zoom lens change. As a result, the picture parameters of the wide-angle lens will change accordingly, and the lens parameters will change accordingly.
  • a display interface 1601 of the terminal's display is shown.
  • annotation information 1602 may be displayed, such as the range mark corresponding to the area to be processed in FIG. 15, the text annotation information of the second image stored in association, and the like.
  • the image identification and format information (DJI00001.jpeg) of the first image can also be displayed.
  • the user can view the second image stored in association by clicking the annotation information 1602 or a specific functional component.
  • the terminal can determine the second image that the user wants to view based on the HTML file and the annotation information 1602, and display it.
  • the user can hide the annotation information 1602 through a specific operation to ensure the viewing effect.
  • the display interface 1601 of the terminal's display may also include an operation button 1603, so that the user can also perform operations such as editing, deleting, and sharing the first image.
  • the label information may not be printed.
  • the HTML file may not be sent.
  • FIG. 17 it is a display interface 1601 of the display of the terminal. Among them, the relationship between the currently displayed second image 1701 and the first image can be displayed.
  • the second image 1701 shown in FIG. 17 is the first (1 of 4) of the four second images corresponding to the to-be-processed area of the first image.
  • the user can also edit, delete, and share the second image 1701.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of an image processing device provided by an embodiment of the disclosure.
  • the image processing device 1800 includes:
  • One or more processors 1810 are configured to perform one or more tasks.
  • the computer-readable storage medium 1820 is configured to store one or more computer programs 1821.
  • the computer program 1821 is executed by the processor 1810, it realizes:
  • the second focal length is greater than the first focal length.
  • the second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length is determined based on the maximum rotatable angle of the posture adjustment device.
  • determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result includes:
  • the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image is any area in the first image.
  • determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result includes:
  • the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image is determined to be the overlapping area of the first maximum viewing angle area and the second maximum viewing angle area.
  • the current attitude angle is the current pitch angle
  • the selectable range of the region to be processed in the first image is determined according to the comparison result, including:
  • the selectable range is determined based on the first upper limit, the second upper limit, and the vertical viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length Optional upper limit in the first maximum viewing angle area.
  • the current attitude angle is the current pitch angle
  • the selectable range of the region to be processed in the first image is determined according to the comparison result, including:
  • the optional The range is the optional lower limit of the first maximum viewing angle area.
  • the current attitude angle is the current yaw angle
  • the selectable range of the region to be processed in the first image is determined according to the comparison result, including:
  • the selectable range is determined to be the selectable left limit of the first maximum viewing angle area.
  • the current attitude angle is the current yaw angle
  • the selectable range of the region to be processed in the first image is determined according to the comparison result, including:
  • the second right limit of the second maximum angle of view area exceeds the first right limit of the first maximum angle of view area, based on the second right limit, the first right limit, and the horizontal direction angle of view area corresponding to the first focal length To determine the selectable range at the selectable right end of the first maximum viewing angle area.
  • the computer program 1821 when applied to the control end of the shooting end, is also used to implement:
  • At least one of the multiple boundaries of the selectable range is displayed.
  • the computer program 1821 when the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image is determined according to the comparison result, when the computer program 1821 is executed by the processor 1810, it is further used to implement:
  • the photographing associated information is determined based on the second focal length and the area to be processed, so as to acquire at least one second image of the area to be processed at the second focal length based on the photographing associated information.
  • the computer program 1821 before determining the area to be processed, when the computer program 1821 is executed by the processor 1810, it is also used to implement:
  • Determine the area to be processed including:
  • the candidate to-be-processed area is determined to be the to-be-processed area.
  • determining the area to be processed includes:
  • determining the area to be processed based on the image recognition algorithm includes:
  • determining the area to be processed based on the image recognition algorithm includes:
  • the area to be processed is determined from the first image based on the preset task and the image recognition algorithm.
  • the photographing related information includes: photographing pose sequence information.
  • the shooting pose sequence information is determined based on the shooting combination information, and the shooting combination information is determined based on the second focal length and the area to be processed.
  • the photographing combination information includes: the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph;
  • Determining photographing related information based on the second focal length and the area to be processed includes:
  • each shooting pose in the shooting pose sequence information corresponds to a to-be-photographed area, so that under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information, a second image corresponding to the to-be-photographed area is captured at the second focal length.
  • determining the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph includes:
  • the area formed by a plurality of areas to be photographed includes the area to be processed.
  • the determination of the number of photographs based on the area to be processed and the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length, and the area to be photographed for each photograph include:
  • the number of photographing times and the area to be photographed for each photograph are determined based on the image overlap ratio between the area to be processed, the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length, and the area to be photographed.
  • determining the shooting pose sequence information based on the area to be photographed includes:
  • the shooting pose corresponding to the area to be photographed each time is determined based on the current pose of the camera at the first focal length and the angular position deviation of the second focal length, and the set of all the determined shooting poses is used as the shooting pose sequence information.
  • the angular position deviation of the second focal length is determined in the following manner:
  • the second focal length angular position deviation between the to-be-photographed area and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length is determined.
  • the computer program 1821 when being executed by the processor 1810, is also used to implement:
  • the shooting end is controlled to shoot the second image corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information.
  • the shooting end includes a shooting device, and controlling the shooting end to shoot the second image corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information includes:
  • the posture adjustment device controls the shooting device to sequentially be in each shooting pose in the shooting pose sequence information, and controls the shooting device to shoot the second images corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length under each shooting pose.
  • the posture adjustment device is provided on a movable platform.
  • the computer program 1821 is executed by the processor 1810 after controlling the shooting end to shoot the second image corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information.
  • the computer program 1821 is executed by the processor 1810 after controlling the shooting end to shoot the second image corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information.
  • the first image and the second image are stored in association.
  • storing the first image and the second image in association includes:
  • the second image when applied to the shooting end, is an unprocessed shooting image.
  • the second image is a processed captured image, and the resolution of the second image is smaller than the resolution of the unprocessed captured image.
  • the computer program 1821 is executed by the processor 1810. , Also used to achieve:
  • the third image is synthesized based on the second image
  • the first image and the third image are stored in association.
  • the first image and the second image are captured by the zoom camera at the first focal length and the second focal length, respectively.
  • the first image is taken by a first photographing device
  • the second image is taken by a second photographing device; wherein the focal length of the first photographing device is at least partially different from the focal length of the second photographing device.
  • the focal length of at least one of the first camera and the second camera is adjustable.
  • the first camera is a wide-angle camera
  • the second camera is a telephoto camera
  • the second focal length includes any one of the following: a fixed focal length, a preset focal length, a focal length determined based on a focal length algorithm, a focal length determined based on a sensor, and a focal length selected by the user.
  • the focal length determined based on the sensor includes a focal length determined based on distance information, and the distance information is determined by a laser rangefinder.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of an image processing system provided by an embodiment of the disclosure.
  • the image processing system 1900 may include:
  • the photographing device 1910 is used to obtain the first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length under the current attitude angle of the photographing device 1910, and to obtain the second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length;
  • the viewing angle area is compared; and the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image is determined according to the comparison result, so as to control the photographing device 1910 to obtain at least one second image of the area to be processed at the second focal length, and the first image is in the first image. Obtained at a focal length; where the second focal length is greater than the first focal length.
  • the second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length is determined based on the maximum rotatable angle of the posture adjustment device.
  • the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to determine that the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image is in the first image if it is determined according to the comparison result that the second maximum angle of view area includes the first maximum angle of view area. Any area of.
  • the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to determine that the second maximum viewing angle area includes part of the first maximum viewing angle area according to the comparison result, and then determining that the selectable range of the to-be-processed area in the first image is the first maximum viewing angle area. The area of overlap between the viewing angle area and the second largest viewing angle area.
  • the photographing device 1910 is specifically used when the current attitude angle is the current pitch angle. If it is determined according to the comparison result that the first upper limit of the first maximum viewing angle area exceeds the second upper limit of the second maximum viewing angle area, it is based on The first upper limit, the second upper limit, and the vertical viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length determine the optional upper limit of the selectable range in the first maximum viewing angle area.
  • the photographing device 1910 is specifically used when the current attitude angle is the current pitch angle. If it is determined according to the comparison result that the second lower limit of the second maximum viewing angle area exceeds the first lower limit of the first maximum viewing angle area, it is based on The second lower limit, the first lower limit, and the vertical viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length determine the optional lower limit of the selectable range in the first maximum viewing angle area.
  • the photographing device 1910 is specifically used when the current attitude angle is the current yaw angle, if it is determined according to the comparison result that the first left limit of the first maximum angle of view area exceeds the second left limit of the second maximum angle of view area , Based on the first left limit, the second left limit, and the horizontal viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length, the selectable range is determined to be the selectable left limit of the first maximum viewing angle area.
  • the photographing device 1910 is specifically used when the current attitude angle is the current yaw angle, if it is determined according to the comparison result that the second right limit of the second maximum viewing angle area exceeds the first right limit of the first maximum viewing angle area , Based on the second right limit, the first right limit, and the horizontal viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length, the selectable range is determined to be the selectable right limit of the first maximum viewing angle area.
  • control terminal 1920 includes a display interface, and the control terminal 1920 is further configured to display at least one of multiple boundaries of the selectable range through the display interface.
  • the photographing device 1910 is further configured to determine the area to be processed after determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result, where the second largest viewing angle area includes the area to be processed; And determining photographing related information based on the second focal length and the area to be processed, so as to control the photographing device 1910 to acquire at least one second image of the area to be processed at the second focal length based on the photographing associated information.
  • the photographing device 1910 is further configured to obtain candidate regions to be processed before determining the regions to be processed;
  • the candidate to-be-processed area is the to-be-processed area if it is determined that the candidate to-be-processed area does not exceed the selectable range.
  • the photographing device 1910 is further configured to output prompt information if it is determined that the candidate to-be-processed area is beyond the selectable range after acquiring the candidate to-be-processed area.
  • the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to determine the area to be processed based on an image recognition algorithm.
  • the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to perform image recognition on the first image, determine the object to be processed, and use the area where the object to be processed is located as the area to be processed.
  • the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to determine the area to be processed from the first image based on a preset task and an image recognition algorithm.
  • the photographing related information includes: photographing pose sequence information.
  • the shooting pose sequence information is determined based on the shooting combination information, and the shooting combination information is determined based on the second focal length and the area to be processed.
  • the photographing combination information includes the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph
  • the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to determine the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph based on the second focal length and the area to be processed; and to determine the photographing pose sequence information based on the area to be photographed; wherein, each of the photographing pose sequence information
  • the shooting pose corresponds to a region to be photographed, so that the photographing device 1910 shoots the second image corresponding to the region to be photographed at the second focal length under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information.
  • the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to determine the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length based on the size of the image sensor and the second focal length; and to determine the number of photographs based on the area to be processed and the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length, And the area to be photographed each time the photograph is taken; wherein the area formed by multiple areas to be photographed includes the area to be processed.
  • the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to determine the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph based on the area to be processed, the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length, and the image overlap ratio between the area to be photographed.
  • the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to determine the photographing pose corresponding to the area to be photographed for each photograph based on the current pose of the camera at the first focal length and the angular position deviation of the second focal length, and determine The collection of all shooting poses is used as the shooting pose sequence information.
  • the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to determine the first deviation between the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length; and determining the area to be processed The second deviation between the designated position of the area and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length; and the third deviation between the designated position of the area to be photographed and the designated position of the area to be processed; and based on the first deviation, The second deviation and the third deviation determine the second focal length angular position deviation between the area to be photographed and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length.
  • the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to photograph the second image corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length under each photographing pose of the photographing pose sequence information.
  • the photographing device 1910 includes a posture adjusting device and a photographing device.
  • the photographing device 1910 is specifically used to control the photographing device to be in each photographing pose in the photographing pose sequence information sequentially through the pose adjusting device, and to control the photographing device In each shooting posture, a second image corresponding to the area to be photographed is shot at the second focal length.
  • the posture adjustment device is provided on a movable platform.
  • the photographing device 1910 is further configured to store the first image and the second image corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length under each photographing pose of the photographing pose sequence information. The second image.
  • the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to determine the first mapping relationship between the second image and the area to be processed, and determine the second mapping relationship between the area to be processed and the first image; and store the first mapping relationship between the area to be processed and the first image.
  • the second image is an unprocessed captured image and stored in the photographing device.
  • the second image is a processed captured image and stored in the control terminal, and the resolution of the second image is smaller than the resolution of the unprocessed captured image.
  • control terminal further includes a display interface
  • control terminal 1920 is further configured to obtain an unprocessed image corresponding to the second image from the photographing device 1910 if an operation instruction for viewing the second image is received. Capturing an image; and displaying the unprocessed captured image corresponding to the second image through the display interface.
  • the photographing device 1910 is also used to control the photographing end to photograph the second image corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length under each photographing position of the photographing position sequence, and then acquire the third image.
  • the third image is synthesized based on the second image; and the first image and the third image are stored in association.
  • the photographing device 1910 includes a zoom photographing device, which is used to photograph the first image and the second image at the first focal length and the second focal length, respectively.
  • the photographing device 1910 includes a first photographing device and a second photographing device
  • the first photographing device is used to photograph a first image
  • the second photographing device is used to photograph a second image
  • the focal length of the first photographing device is at least partially different from the focal length of the second photographing device.
  • the focal length of at least one of the first camera and the second camera is adjustable.
  • the first camera is a wide-angle camera
  • the second camera is a telephoto camera
  • the second focal length includes any one of the following: a fixed focal length, a preset focal length, a focal length determined based on a focal length algorithm, a focal length determined based on a sensor, and a focal length selected by the user.
  • the photographing device 1910 includes a laser rangefinder, and the laser rangefinder is used to measure distance information to determine the second focal length based on the distance information.
  • the image processing system shown above is only exemplary and cannot be construed as a limitation of the present disclosure.
  • the operations implemented by the photographing device 1910 in the above-mentioned image processing system may be at least partially executed by the control terminal 1920.
  • the operations implemented by the photographing device 1910 in the above-mentioned image processing system can be at least partially performed by an unmanned aerial vehicle.
  • control terminal 1920 may obtain the first maximum angle of view area corresponding to the first focal length of the photographing device 1910 at the current attitude angle, and obtain the second maximum angle of view area corresponding to the second focal length; combine the first maximum angle of view area with the first Compare the two regions with the largest viewing angle; and determine the selectable range of the region to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result, so as to control the photographing device 1910 to obtain at least one second image of the region to be processed at the second focal length, where the first image is Obtained at a first focal length; wherein the second focal length is greater than the first focal length.
  • control terminal 1920 may be configured to determine that the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image is any area in the first image if it is determined according to the comparison result that the second maximum angle of view area includes the first maximum angle of view area.
  • the photographing device 1910 described above may be any device with a photographing function, and may refer to a camera, a pan-tilt camera, a movable platform including a camera, and the like.
  • each block in the flowchart or block diagram may represent a module, program segment, or part of the code, and the above-mentioned module, program segment, or part of the code contains one or more for realizing the specified logic function.
  • Executable instructions may also occur in a different order from the order marked in the drawings. For example, two blocks shown in succession can actually be executed substantially in parallel, and they can sometimes be executed in the reverse order, depending on the functions involved.
  • each block in the block diagram or flowchart, and the combination of blocks in the block diagram or flowchart can be implemented by a dedicated hardware-based system that performs the specified function or operation, or can be implemented by It is realized by a combination of dedicated hardware and computer instructions.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a control terminal provided by an embodiment of the disclosure.
  • the control terminal 70 may include: at least one processor 701, such as a CPU, at least one network interface 704, a user interface 703, a memory 705, at least one communication bus 702, and a display screen 706.
  • the communication bus 702 is used to implement connection and communication between these components.
  • the user interface 703 may include a touch screen, a keyboard, a mouse, a joystick, and so on.
  • the network interface 704 may optionally include a standard wired interface and a wireless interface (such as a WI-FI interface), and a communication connection with the server and the camera 20 can be established through the network interface 704.
  • the memory 705 may be a high-speed RAM memory or a non-volatile memory (non-volatile memory), such as at least one disk memory.
  • the memory 705 includes the flash in the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the memory 705 may also be at least one storage system located far away from the foregoing processor 701.
  • the memory 705 as a computer storage medium may include an operating system, a network communication module, a user interface module, and program instructions.
  • the network interface 704 can be connected to an acquirer, a transmitter, or other communication modules.
  • Other communication modules can include but are not limited to a WiFi module, a Bluetooth module, etc.
  • the control terminal 70 in the embodiment of the present application may also include acquiring Receivers, transmitters and other communication modules.
  • the processor 701 may be used to call program instructions stored in the memory 705 and perform the following operations:
  • the second focal length is greater than the first focal length.
  • control terminal 70 in this embodiment can be specifically implemented according to the method in the above method embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a photographing device provided by an embodiment of the disclosure.
  • the photographing device 80 may include: at least one processor 801, such as a CPU, at least one network interface 804, a zoom lens 803, a memory 805, a wide-angle lens 806, and at least one communication bus 802.
  • the communication bus 802 is used to implement connection and communication between these components.
  • the network interface 20 port 804 may optionally include a standard wired interface and a wireless interface (such as a WI-FI interface), and a communication connection with the control terminal 70 can be established through the network interface 804.
  • the memory 805 may be a high-speed RAM memory or a non-volatile memory (non-volatile memory), such as at least one disk memory.
  • the memory 805 includes the flash in the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the memory 805 may also be at least one storage system located far away from the aforementioned processor 801.
  • the memory 805 as a computer storage medium may include an operating system, a network communication module, and program instructions.
  • the network interface 804 can be connected to an acquirer, a transmitter, or other communication modules.
  • Other communication modules can include but are not limited to a WiFi module, a Bluetooth module, etc.
  • the flight trajectory recording device in the embodiment of the present invention can also include Obtainers, transmitters and other communication modules, etc.
  • the processor 801 may be used to call the program instructions stored in the memory 805 and perform the following operations:
  • the second focal length is greater than the first focal length.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores instructions in the computer-readable storage medium, and when it runs on a computer or a processor, the computer or the processor executes any one of the above methods. Or multiple steps. If each component module of the above-mentioned signal processing device is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the above embodiments it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted through the computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer instructions can be sent from a website site, computer, server, or data center to another website site via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) , Computer, server or data center for transmission.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (SSD)).
  • the aforementioned storage medium may be a magnetic disk, an optical disc, a read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), or a random storage memory RAM, etc.
  • the technical features in this embodiment and the implementation can be combined arbitrarily.

Abstract

Provided is an image processing method, comprising: acquiring a first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to a first focal length at the current attitude angle, and obtaining a second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to a second focal length; comparing the first maximum viewing angle area with the second maximum viewing angle area; and determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in a first image according to a comparison result, so as to obtain at least one second image of the area to be processed at the second focal length, wherein the first image is acquired at the first focal length, and the second focal length is greater than the first focal length. According to the present disclosure, the photographable range of a combined lens with multiple focal lengths at multiple focal lengths can be determined, such that a user can understand the photographable range at a specified focal length, thereby improving the user experience.

Description

图像处理方法、图像处理装置和图像处理系统Image processing method, image processing device and image processing system 技术领域Technical field
本公开涉及图像处理技术领域,尤其涉及一种图像处理方法、图像处理装置和图像处理系统。The present disclosure relates to the field of image processing technology, and in particular to an image processing method, an image processing device, and an image processing system.
背景技术Background technique
在勘测或巡检的时候,经常遇到这样的需求,例如需要拍摄一座100米高的铁塔,并且需要查看到铁塔的细节部位的每一个细节,看看是否有螺丝钉生锈了,或者钢材出了异常情况。During surveys or inspections, such needs are often encountered. For example, it is necessary to photograph a 100-meter-high iron tower, and it is necessary to check every detail of the detailed parts of the iron tower to see if any screws are rusted, or the steel is out. An abnormal situation.
然而,由于具有多种焦距的组合镜头在不同焦距下的可拍摄范围不同,使得用户难以通过软件应用确定具有多种焦距的组合镜头在多种焦距下的可拍摄范围,进而不便于用户通过软件应用控制组合镜头拍摄指定焦距下所需的图像,造成用户体验不佳。However, due to the different shooting ranges of combined lenses with multiple focal lengths at different focal lengths, it is difficult for users to determine the shooting ranges of combined lenses with multiple focal lengths under multiple focal lengths through software applications, which makes it difficult for users to use software. The application controls the combined lens to shoot the required image at the specified focal length, causing a poor user experience.
公开内容Public content
有鉴于此,本公开实施例提供一种图像处理方法、图像处理装置和图像处理系统,可以通过特定的应用软件确定具有多种焦距的组合镜头在多种焦距下的可拍摄范围,以便于用户了解指定焦距下可拍摄的范围,提升用户体验。In view of this, the embodiments of the present disclosure provide an image processing method, an image processing device, and an image processing system, which can determine the shooting range of a combined lens with multiple focal lengths at multiple focal lengths through specific application software, so as to facilitate users Understand the range of shooting under the specified focal length to improve user experience.
第一方面,本公开实施例提供了一种图像处理方法,该方法包括:获得当前姿态角下与第一焦距对应的第一最大视角区域,并且获得与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域;将第一最大视角区域和第二最大视角区域进行比较;以及根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,以便于获取待处理区域在第二焦距下的至少一个第二图像,第一图像是在第一焦距下获取的;其中,第二焦距大于第一焦距。In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure provides an image processing method, the method includes: obtaining a first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to a first focal length at a current attitude angle, and obtaining a second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to a second focal length ; Compare the first maximum viewing angle area with the second maximum viewing angle area; and determine the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result, so as to obtain at least one second of the area to be processed under the second focal length Image, the first image is acquired at the first focal length; wherein the second focal length is greater than the first focal length.
在应用中,由于与第一焦距对应的视角区域和与第二焦距对应的视角区域不同,在诸如通过姿态调整装置调整相机的姿态时,相机的最大位姿可调范围受姿态调整装置的机械结构等影响,导致存在与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域不能完全包括当前姿态角下与第一焦距对应的第一最大视角区域的情形。又由于用户并不清楚第一最大视角区域中哪些区域与第二最大视角区域相重叠,即,用户并不清楚第一图像中哪些区域可以利用第二焦距进行拍照以获得更清晰的局部图像。因此,存在用户选取的待处理区域超出上述相重叠的区域时,无法以第二焦距进行拍照的情形,导致用户不满。此外,当用户选取的待处理区域超出上述相重叠的区域时,容易造成姿态调整装置受损。然而,本公开实施例提供的图像处理方法,可以将当前姿态角下与第一焦距对应的第一最大视角区域和与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域进行比较,进而确定待处理区域在与第一最大视角区域对应的第一图像中的可选范围,以便于获取待处理区域在第二焦距下的至少一个第二图像。如此,确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,不仅可以使得用户明确上述第一图像中哪些区域可以利用第二焦距进行拍照以获得更清晰的局部图像,也可以通过可选范围限制用户操作、姿态调整装置的调整范围等措施降低姿态调整装置受损的可能。In application, since the angle of view area corresponding to the first focal length is different from the angle of view area corresponding to the second focal length, for example, when the posture of the camera is adjusted by the posture adjustment device, the maximum posture adjustment range of the camera is affected by the mechanical of the posture adjustment device. Due to the influence of the structure and the like, the second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length may not completely include the first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length under the current attitude angle. Also, because the user is not clear about which areas in the first maximum viewing angle area overlap with the second maximum viewing angle area, that is, the user is not clear about which areas in the first image can be photographed with the second focal length to obtain a clearer partial image. Therefore, when the area to be processed selected by the user exceeds the above-mentioned overlapping area, it is impossible to take pictures at the second focal length, resulting in dissatisfaction of the user. In addition, when the area to be processed selected by the user exceeds the overlapped area, the posture adjustment device is likely to be damaged. However, the image processing method provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure can compare the first maximum angle of view area corresponding to the first focal length and the second maximum angle of view area corresponding to the second focal length under the current attitude angle to determine whether the area to be processed is in The selectable range in the first image corresponding to the first maximum viewing angle area, so as to obtain at least one second image of the area to be processed at the second focal length. In this way, determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image not only allows the user to clarify which areas in the first image can be photographed with the second focal length to obtain a clearer partial image, but also can be limited by the selectable range Measures such as user operation and adjustment range of the attitude adjustment device reduce the possibility of damage to the attitude adjustment device.
第二方面,本公开实施例提供了一种图像处理装置,该图像处理装置包括:一个或多个处理器;以及计算机可读存储介质。该计算机可读存储介质用于存储一个或多个计算机程序,计算机程序在被处理器执行时,实现:获得当前姿态角下与第一焦距对应的第一最大视角区域,并且获得与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域;将第一最大视角区域和第二最大视角区域进行比较;以及根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,以便于获取待处理区域在第二焦距下的至少一个第二图像,第一图像是在第一焦距下获取的;其中,第二焦距大于第一焦距。In a second aspect, embodiments of the present disclosure provide an image processing device, which includes: one or more processors; and a computer-readable storage medium. The computer-readable storage medium is used to store one or more computer programs. When the computer program is executed by the processor, it realizes: obtain the first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length under the current attitude angle, and obtain the second focal length The corresponding second largest viewing angle area; comparing the first largest viewing angle area with the second largest viewing angle area; and determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result, so as to obtain the area to be processed in the second At least one second image at the focal length, the first image is acquired at the first focal length; wherein the second focal length is greater than the first focal length.
本公开实施例提供的图像处理装置,可以自动确定待处理区域在第一图 像中的可选范围,进而便于用户确定第一图像中可以利用第二焦距进行拍照的区域,以获得更清晰的局部图像,有助于提升用户体验度,并且有助于减小姿态调整装置受损的可能性。The image processing device provided by the embodiment of the present disclosure can automatically determine the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image, thereby facilitating the user to determine the area in the first image that can be photographed with the second focal length, so as to obtain a clearer part The image helps to improve the user experience and helps reduce the possibility of damage to the posture adjustment device.
第三方面,本公开实施例提供了一种图像处理系统,该图像处理系统包括:拍照装置以及与拍照装置通信连接的控制终端,控制装置用于获取待处理区域,拍照装置用于获得拍照装置在当前姿态角下与第一焦距对应的第一最大视角区域,并且获得与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域;将第一最大视角区域和第二最大视角区域进行比较;以及根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,以便控制拍照装置获取待处理区域在第二焦距下的至少一个第二图像,第一图像是在第一焦距下获取的,其中,第二焦距大于第一焦距。In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure provides an image processing system. The image processing system includes a photographing device and a control terminal communicatively connected to the photographing device. The control device is used to obtain the area to be processed, and the photographing device is used to obtain the photographing device. The first maximum angle of view area corresponding to the first focal length under the current attitude angle, and the second maximum angle of view area corresponding to the second focal length is obtained; the first maximum angle of view area and the second maximum angle of view area are compared; and according to the comparison result Determine the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image, so as to control the photographing device to acquire at least one second image of the area to be processed at the second focal length. The first image is acquired at the first focal length, where the second The focal length is greater than the first focal length.
本公开实施例提供的图像处理系统,可以由拍照装置自动确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,进而便于用户确定第一图像中可以利用第二焦距进行拍照的可拍照区域,以便用户控制拍照装置在第二焦距下获得该可拍照区域的更清晰的局部图像,有助于提升用户体验度,并且有助于减小姿态调整装置受损的可能性。In the image processing system provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure, the photographing device can automatically determine the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image, thereby facilitating the user to determine the photographable area in the first image that can be photographed with the second focal length, so that The user controls the photographing device to obtain a clearer partial image of the photographable area at the second focal length, which helps to improve the user experience and helps reduce the possibility of damage to the posture adjustment device.
第四方面,本公开实施例提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,其存储有可执行指令,该可执行指令在由一个或多个处理器执行时,可以使一个或多个处理器执行如上的方法。In a fourth aspect, embodiments of the present disclosure provide a computer-readable storage medium that stores executable instructions that, when executed by one or more processors, can cause one or more processors to execute the above Methods.
本公开的附加方面的优点将在下面的描述中部分给出,部分将从下面的描述中变得明显,或通过本公开的实践了解到。The advantages of the additional aspects of the present disclosure will be partially given in the following description, and some will become obvious from the following description, or be understood through the practice of the present disclosure.
附图说明Description of the drawings
通过参照附图的以下详细描述,本公开实施例的上述和其他目的、特征和优点将变得更容易理解。在附图中,将以示例以及非限制性的方式对本公开的多个实施例进行说明,其中:Through the following detailed description with reference to the accompanying drawings, the above and other objects, features, and advantages of the embodiments of the present disclosure will become easier to understand. In the drawings, a number of embodiments of the present disclosure will be described in an exemplary and non-limiting manner, in which:
图1为本公开实施例提供的图像处理方法、图像处理装置和图像处理系统的应用场景;FIG. 1 is an application scenario of an image processing method, image processing device, and image processing system provided by embodiments of the disclosure;
图2为本公开另一实施例提供的图像处理方法、图像处理装置和图像处理系统的应用场景;2 is an application scenario of an image processing method, image processing device, and image processing system provided by another embodiment of the present disclosure;
图3为本公开实施例提供的图像处理方法的流程示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of an image processing method provided by an embodiment of the disclosure;
图4为本公开实施例提供的与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域在垂直向的范围示意图;4 is a schematic diagram of a vertical range of a second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to a second focal length provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图5-图10为本公开实施例提供的控制终端显示界面示意图;5 to 10 are schematic diagrams of the display interface of the control terminal provided by the embodiments of the disclosure;
图11为本公开实施例提供的待处理区域划分示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of the division of to-be-processed areas provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图12为本公开实施例提供的待拍照区域的示意图;FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of an area to be photographed according to an embodiment of the disclosure;
图13为本公开实施例提供的拍摄张数为奇数时的示意图;FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram when the number of shots provided by an embodiment of the disclosure is an odd number;
图14为本公开实施例提供的拍摄张数为偶数时的示意图;14 is a schematic diagram when the number of shots provided by an embodiment of the disclosure is an even number;
图15-图17为本公开实施例提供的显示图像的示意图;15-17 are schematic diagrams of display images provided by embodiments of the disclosure;
图18为本公开实施例提供的图像处理装置的结构示意图;FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of an image processing device provided by an embodiment of the disclosure;
图19为本公开实施例提供的图像处理系统的结构示意图;FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of an image processing system provided by an embodiment of the disclosure;
图20为本公开实施例提供的控制终端的结构示意图;以及FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a control terminal provided by an embodiment of the disclosure; and
图21为本公开实施例提供的拍照装置的构示意图。FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a photographing device provided by an embodiment of the disclosure.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面详细描述本公开的实施例,实施例的示例在附图中示出,其中自始至终相同或类似的标号表示相同或类似的元件或具有相同或类似功能的元件。下面通过参考附图描述的实施例是示例性的,旨在用于解释本公开,而不能理解为对本公开的限制。The embodiments of the present disclosure are described in detail below. Examples of the embodiments are shown in the accompanying drawings, in which the same or similar reference numerals denote the same or similar elements or elements with the same or similar functions. The embodiments described below with reference to the drawings are exemplary, and are intended to explain the present disclosure, but should not be construed as limiting the present disclosure.
图1为本公开实施例提供的图像处理方法、图像处理装置和图像处理系统的应用场景。如图1所示,无人飞行器10能够绕着多达三个正交轴旋转,例如第一俯仰轴(X1)、第一航向轴(Y1)及第一横滚轴(Z1)。绕着三个轴 旋转可以指的是俯仰旋转、航向旋转及横滚旋转。无人飞行器10绕着第一俯仰轴、第一航向轴及第一横滚轴的角速度可以表示为ωX1、ωY1、ωZ1。无人飞行器10能够沿着第一俯仰轴、第一航向轴及第一横滚轴平移执行运动。无人飞行器10沿着第一俯仰轴、第一航向轴及第一横滚轴的线速度可以分别表示为VX1、VY1、VZ1。需要说明的是,无人飞行器10仅为应用场景的示例性说明,不能理解为对本公开的应用场景的限定,本公开还可以应用于多种可移动平台。例如,可移动平台还可以为云台车、手持云台、机器人等,这些可移动平台中可以绕着一个轴或两个轴旋转,或者不能绕着轴旋转。Fig. 1 is an application scenario of an image processing method, an image processing device, and an image processing system provided by embodiments of the disclosure. As shown in FIG. 1, the UAV 10 can rotate around up to three orthogonal axes, such as a first pitch axis (X1), a first heading axis (Y1), and a first roll axis (Z1). Rotating around three axes can refer to pitch rotation, heading rotation and roll rotation. The angular velocity of the UAV 10 around the first pitch axis, the first yaw axis, and the first roll axis can be expressed as ωX1, ωY1, and ωZ1. The unmanned aerial vehicle 10 can perform movement in translation along a first pitch axis, a first yaw axis, and a first roll axis. The linear velocity of the unmanned aerial vehicle 10 along the first pitch axis, the first yaw axis, and the first roll axis can be denoted as VX1, VY1, and VZ1, respectively. It should be noted that the unmanned aerial vehicle 10 is only an exemplary description of the application scenario, and cannot be understood as a limitation on the application scenario of the present disclosure. The present disclosure can also be applied to a variety of movable platforms. For example, the movable platform may also be a pan-tilt cart, a handheld pan-tilt, a robot, etc., these movable platforms can rotate around one axis or two axes, or cannot rotate around an axis.
如图1所示,拍摄装置20通过承载体搭载在无人飞行器10上。承载体能够使拍摄装置20相对于无人飞行器10绕着和/或者沿着多达三个正交轴(在其它实施例中,也可以为非正交轴),如第二俯仰轴(X2)、第二航向轴(Y2)及第二横滚轴(Z2)运动。第二俯仰轴、第二航向轴及第二横滚轴可以分别平行于第一俯仰轴、第一航向轴及第一横滚轴。在一些可能的实施例中,负载是包括光学模块的影像设备,第二横滚轴可以大致平行于光学模块的光路径及光学轴。光学模块可以与影像传感器连接,以捕获影像。承载体可以根据与承载体相连接的致动器,如电机发出控制信号,使承载体绕着多达三个正交轴,如第二俯仰轴、第二航向轴及第二横滚轴旋转。绕着三个轴的旋转可以分别指俯仰旋转,航向旋转及横滚旋转。拍摄装置20绕着第二俯仰轴、第二航向轴及第二横滚轴的角速度可以分别表示为为ωX2、ωY2、ωZ2。承载体可以使拍摄装置20相对于无人飞行器10沿着第二俯仰轴、第二航向轴及第二横滚轴做平移运动。拍摄装置20沿着第二俯仰轴、第二航向轴及第二横滚轴的线速度可以分别表示为VX2、VY2、VZ2。As shown in FIG. 1, the imaging device 20 is mounted on the unmanned aerial vehicle 10 via a carrier. The carrier can make the imaging device 20 move around and/or along up to three orthogonal axes (in other embodiments, non-orthogonal axes) relative to the UAV 10, such as the second pitch axis (X2 ), the second yaw axis (Y2) and the second roll axis (Z2) move. The second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis may be parallel to the first pitch axis, the first yaw axis, and the first roll axis, respectively. In some possible embodiments, the load is an imaging device including an optical module, and the second roll axis may be substantially parallel to the optical path and the optical axis of the optical module. The optical module can be connected with an image sensor to capture images. The carrier can send a control signal according to an actuator connected to the carrier, such as a motor, so that the carrier can rotate around up to three orthogonal axes, such as the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis. . Rotation around the three axes can be referred to as pitch rotation, heading rotation and roll rotation. The angular velocity of the camera 20 around the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis can be expressed as ωX2, ωY2, and ωZ2, respectively. The carrier can make the imaging device 20 move relative to the UAV 10 along the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis. The linear velocity of the camera 20 along the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis can be denoted as VX2, VY2, VZ2, respectively.
在一些可能的实施例中,承载体可以只允许拍摄装置20相对于无人飞行器10绕着三个轴(第二俯仰轴、第二航向轴及第二横滚轴)的子集旋转运动。例如,承载体可以只允许拍摄装置20绕着第二俯仰轴、第二航向轴 及第二横滚轴或者其中任意轴的组合进行旋转运动,而不允许拍摄装置20沿着任何轴平移运动。例如,承载体可以允许拍摄装置20只绕着第二俯仰轴、第二航向轴及第二横滚轴中的其中一个轴旋转。承载体可以允许拍摄装置20只绕着第二俯仰轴、第二航向轴及第二横滚轴中的其中两个轴旋转。承载体可以允许拍摄装置20绕着第二俯仰轴、第二航向轴及第二横滚轴这三个轴旋转。In some possible embodiments, the carrier may only allow the camera 20 to rotate relative to the UAV 10 about a subset of the three axes (the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis). For example, the carrier may only allow the camera 20 to rotate around the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis or a combination of any of them, but not allow the camera 20 to move in translation along any axis. For example, the carrier may allow the camera 20 to rotate around only one of the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis. The carrier may allow the camera 20 to rotate around only two of the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis. The carrier may allow the camera device 20 to rotate around the three axes of the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis.
在一些可能的实施例中,承载体可以只允许拍摄装置20沿着第二俯仰轴、第二航向轴及第二横滚轴或者其中任意轴的结合平移运动,而不允许拍摄装置20绕着任何轴旋转运动。例如,承载体可以允许拍摄装置20只沿着第二俯仰轴、第二航向轴及第二横滚轴中的其中一个轴运动。承载体可以允许拍摄装置20只沿着第二俯仰轴、第二航向轴及第二横滚轴中的其中两个轴运动。承载体可以允许拍摄装置20沿着第二俯仰轴、第二航向轴及第二横滚轴这三个轴运动。In some possible embodiments, the carrier may only allow the camera 20 to move along the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis or a combined translational movement of any of them, but not allow the camera 20 to move around. Any axis rotation movement. For example, the carrier may allow the camera 20 to move along only one of the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis. The carrier may allow the camera 20 to move along only two of the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis. The carrier may allow the camera 20 to move along the three axes of the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis.
在一些可能的实施例中,承载体可以允许拍摄装置20相对于无人飞行器10执行旋转运动及平移运动。例如,承载体可以允许拍摄装置20沿着和/或者绕着第二俯仰轴、第二航向轴及第二横滚轴中的其中一个轴、两个轴或者三个轴运动。In some possible embodiments, the carrier may allow the camera 20 to perform rotational and translational motions relative to the UAV 10. For example, the carrier may allow the camera 20 to move along and/or around one, two, or three of the second pitch axis, the second yaw axis, and the second roll axis.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍摄装置20可以直接搭载在无人飞行器10上而不需要承载体,或者承载体不允许拍摄装置20相对于无人飞行器10运动。在这种情况下,拍摄装置20的姿态、位置和/或者方向相对于无人飞行器10是固定的。In some possible embodiments, the imaging device 20 may be directly mounted on the UAV 10 without a carrier, or the carrier does not allow the imaging device 20 to move relative to the UAV 10. In this case, the posture, position, and/or direction of the photographing device 20 are fixed relative to the unmanned aerial vehicle 10.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍摄装置20的姿态、方向和/或位置的调整,可以单独地或者共同地,通过对无人飞行器10、承载体和/或拍摄装置20的适度调整来实现。例如,拍摄装置20绕着指定轴(如航向轴)旋转80度可以通过如下方法实现:无人飞行器10单独旋转80度、通过承载体致动使负载相对于无人飞行器10旋转80度、无人飞行器10旋转50度同时负载相对 于无人飞行器10旋转30度。In some possible embodiments, the adjustment of the posture, direction and/or position of the photographing device 20 may be achieved individually or collectively by appropriate adjustments to the UAV 10, the carrier and/or the photographing device 20. For example, the camera 20 can be rotated 80 degrees around a designated axis (such as a heading axis) by the following method: the UAV 10 rotates 80 degrees alone, the load is rotated 80 degrees relative to the UAV 10 through actuation of the carrier, and no The human aircraft 10 rotates 50 degrees while the load rotates 30 degrees relative to the unmanned aircraft 10.
相似地,其它负载的平移运动可以通过对无人飞行器10及承载体的适度调整实现。进一步地,负载的操作参数的调整也可以通过无人飞行器10、承载体或无人飞行器10的控制终端中的一个或多个来完成。其中,负载的操作参数可以包括,如影像设备的变焦程度或者焦距。Similarly, the translational movement of other loads can be achieved by proper adjustment of the UAV 10 and the carrier. Further, the adjustment of the operating parameters of the load can also be completed by one or more of the UAV 10, the carrier, or the control terminal of the UAV 10. Among them, the operating parameters of the load may include, for example, the zoom degree or the focal length of the imaging device.
例如,无人飞行器10可以包括无人飞行器,及拍摄装置20可以包括影像设备。For example, the unmanned aerial vehicle 10 may include an unmanned aerial vehicle, and the photographing device 20 may include an imaging device.
在一个实施例中,在该应用场景中还可以包括控制终端30。其中,可移动平台可以是飞行器(如无人飞行器)、云台车、手持云台、机器人等。控制终端30可以是手机、平板电脑等装置,还可以具有遥控功能,以实现对无人飞行器10等可移动平台的遥控控制。无人飞行器10可以包括云台等姿态调整装置(如上述说明的承载体),拍摄装置20可以搭载在云台上。拍摄装置20可以为一个,拍摄装置20可以包括第一镜头以及第二镜头,分别用于执行不同的拍摄任务,当然,拍摄装置20也可以包括两个或以上,第一镜头和第二镜头位于不同的拍摄装置。第一镜头和第二镜头可以是相机常规拍摄功能对应的镜头。例如,第一镜头和第二镜头可以分别是广角镜头及变焦镜头。其中,广角镜头可以用于获取较宽泛、完整的画面,变焦镜头可以用于获取高清细节,云台可以用于调整拍摄装置20的拍摄角度,无人飞行器10可以用于保证运动平稳且无漂移。控制终端30可以用于控制无人飞行器10的运动。控制终端30还可以获取拍摄装置20返回的拍摄画面,供用户查看。此外,控制终端30还可以获取用户对拍摄装置20的控制指令,并将该控制指令发送给拍照装置。控制指令例如可以是控制拍摄装置20的变焦镜30头的变焦倍数的指令,或者可以是控制拍摄装置20的变焦镜头的拍照范围的指令等。In an embodiment, the control terminal 30 may also be included in the application scenario. Among them, the movable platform can be an aircraft (such as an unmanned aerial vehicle), a pan-tilt cart, a handheld pan-tilt, a robot, and so on. The control terminal 30 may be a device such as a mobile phone or a tablet computer, and may also have a remote control function to realize remote control of a movable platform such as the unmanned aerial vehicle 10. The unmanned aerial vehicle 10 may include an attitude adjustment device (such as the carrier described above) such as a pan/tilt, and the imaging device 20 may be mounted on the pan/tilt. There may be one photographing device 20. The photographing device 20 may include a first lens and a second lens for performing different photographing tasks. Of course, the photographing device 20 may also include two or more. The first lens and the second lens are located at Different camera devices. The first lens and the second lens may be lenses corresponding to the conventional shooting function of the camera. For example, the first lens and the second lens may be a wide-angle lens and a zoom lens, respectively. Among them, a wide-angle lens can be used to obtain a wider and complete picture, a zoom lens can be used to obtain high-definition details, a pan-tilt can be used to adjust the shooting angle of the camera 20, and the UAV 10 can be used to ensure smooth movement and no drift. The control terminal 30 can be used to control the movement of the unmanned aerial vehicle 10. The control terminal 30 can also obtain the shooting screen returned by the shooting device 20 for the user to view. In addition, the control terminal 30 can also obtain a user's control instruction on the photographing device 20, and send the control instruction to the photographing device. The control instruction may be, for example, an instruction to control the zoom factor of the zoom lens 30 of the photographing device 20, or may be an instruction to control the photographing range of the zoom lens of the photographing device 20, or the like.
无人飞行器10可以包括各类型的UAV(Unmanned Aerial Vehicle,无人机),例如四旋翼UAV、六旋翼UAV等。其包括的云台可以是三轴云台,即 该云台的姿态可以在俯仰轴、横滚轴以及航向轴这三个轴上进行控制,以便于确定出云台的相应姿态,使得搭载在云台上的拍摄装置20能够完成相应的拍摄任务。The unmanned aerial vehicle 10 may include various types of UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle, unmanned aerial vehicle), such as a quadrotor UAV, a hexarotor UAV, and the like. The gimbal included can be a three-axis gimbal, that is, the attitude of the gimbal can be controlled on the three axes of the pitch axis, roll axis, and yaw axis, so as to determine the corresponding attitude of the gimbal so that it can be mounted on The photographing device 20 on the pan/tilt can complete corresponding photographing tasks.
本公开的实施例中,无人飞行器10可以通过无线连接方式(例如基于WiFi或射频通信的无线连接方式等)与上述控制终端30建立通信连接。控制终端30可以是带摇杆及显示屏的控制器,通过杆量来对无人飞行器10进行控制。控制终端30也可以为智能手机、平板电脑等智能设备,可以通过在用户界面UI上配置飞行轨迹来控制无人飞行器10自动飞行,或者通过体感等方式来控制无人飞行器10自动飞行,或者通过预先在无人飞行器10飞行的过程中记录好飞行轨迹后,控制无人飞行器1沿着记录好的飞行轨迹自动飞行。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the unmanned aerial vehicle 10 may establish a communication connection with the above-mentioned control terminal 30 through a wireless connection method (for example, a wireless connection method based on WiFi or radio frequency communication, etc.). The control terminal 30 may be a controller with a joystick and a display screen, and the UAV 10 is controlled by the amount of the stick. The control terminal 30 can also be a smart device such as a smart phone or a tablet computer. It can control the unmanned aerial vehicle 10 to fly automatically by configuring the flight trajectory on the user interface UI, or control the unmanned aerial vehicle 10 to fly automatically by means of body sensing, or through After the flight trajectory is recorded during the flight of the UAV 10 in advance, the UAV 1 is controlled to automatically fly along the recorded flight trajectory.
本公开的实施例中,拍摄装置20也可以通过无线连接方式(例如基于WiFi或射频通信的无线连接方式等)与上述控制终端30建立通信连接。例如,拍摄装置20通过可移动平台的无线通信模块与上述控制终端30建立无线通信连接。又例如,拍摄装置20可以通过自身与上述控制终端30建立通信连接,其中,在一些实施例中,拍摄装置20为独立的拍摄设备,如运动相机。控制终端30可以安装用于控制拍摄装置20的应用软件,用户可以通过该应用软件在控制终端30的显示界面中查看拍照装置返回的拍摄画面,以及提供用户与控制终端30、拍摄装置20的交互接口。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the photographing device 20 may also establish a communication connection with the above-mentioned control terminal 30 through a wireless connection method (for example, a wireless connection method based on WiFi or radio frequency communication, etc.). For example, the photographing device 20 establishes a wireless communication connection with the aforementioned control terminal 30 through a wireless communication module of a movable platform. For another example, the photographing device 20 may establish a communication connection with the aforementioned control terminal 30 by itself, wherein, in some embodiments, the photographing device 20 is an independent photographing device, such as a sports camera. The control terminal 30 can install application software for controlling the shooting device 20, and the user can view the shooting screen returned by the shooting device on the display interface of the control terminal 30 through the application software, and provide the user with the interaction between the control terminal 30 and the shooting device 20 interface.
拍摄装置20包括半导体电耦合器件(charge-coupled devices,CCD),使用互补型金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor,CMOS),或者N型金属-氧化物-半导体(N-type metal-oxide-semiconductor,NMOS,Live MOS),或者其它类型的传感器。具体地,传感器可以是无人飞行器所搭载的影像设备(如相机)的一部分,影像设备可以通过云台搭载在无人飞行器上,云台可以调整拍摄装置20的姿态角。The imaging device 20 includes charge-coupled devices (CCD), and uses complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS), or N-type metal-oxide-semiconductor (N-type metal-semiconductor). oxide-semiconductor, NMOS, Live MOS), or other types of sensors. Specifically, the sensor may be a part of the imaging equipment (such as a camera) carried by the unmanned aerial vehicle. The imaging equipment may be carried on the unmanned aerial vehicle through a pan/tilt, which can adjust the attitude angle of the photographing device 20.
拍摄装置20捕获的影像数据可以存储到数据存储设备中。数据存储设 备可以基于半导体、磁、光学或者任何适合的技术,及数据存储设备可以包括闪存、USB驱动、存储卡、固态驱动、硬盘驱动、软盘、光盘、磁盘等。例如,数据存储设备包括可移动存储设备,该可移动存储设备能够可拆卸的连接在影像设备上,如任何适合格式的存储卡,如个人计算机卡、微型快擦写存储卡、SM卡、Memory Stick记忆棒、Memory Stick Duo记忆棒、Memory Stick PRO Duo记忆棒、迷你记忆卡、多媒体记忆卡、微型多媒体记忆卡、MMCmicro卡、PS2卡、SD卡、SxS记忆卡、UFS卡、微型SD卡、MicroSD卡、xD卡、iStick卡、串行闪存模块、NT卡、XQD卡等。数据存储设备也可以包括外置的硬盘驱动、光盘驱动、磁盘驱动、软盘驱动或者其它任何与影像设备连接的适合的存储设备。The image data captured by the camera 20 can be stored in a data storage device. The data storage device may be based on semiconductor, magnetic, optical or any suitable technology, and the data storage device may include flash memory, USB drive, memory card, solid state drive, hard disk drive, floppy disk, optical disk, magnetic disk, etc. For example, data storage devices include removable storage devices that can be detachably connected to imaging devices, such as memory cards of any suitable format, such as personal computer cards, micro flash memory cards, SM cards, and Memory Stick Memory Stick, Memory Stick Duo Memory Stick, Memory Stick PRO Duo Memory Stick, Mini Memory Card, Multimedia Memory Card, Micro Multimedia Memory Card, MMCmicro Card, PS2 Card, SD Card, SxS Memory Card, UFS Card, Micro SD Card, MicroSD card, xD card, iStick card, serial flash memory module, NT card, XQD card, etc. The data storage device may also include an external hard disk drive, optical disk drive, magnetic disk drive, floppy disk drive, or any other suitable storage device connected to the imaging device.
拍摄装置20捕获的影像可以通过无线通信模块传送给控制终端30。在一些可能的实施例中,该影像数据在无线通信模块传送之前可以被压缩或者经过其它处理。在其它实施例中,影像数据在传送之前也可以不经过压缩或者其它处理。所传送的影像数据可以显示在控制终端30上,以便操作用户终端的用户可以看到该影像数据和/或基于该影像数据与控制终端30交互。The image captured by the camera 20 can be transmitted to the control terminal 30 through the wireless communication module. In some possible embodiments, the image data may be compressed or subjected to other processing before being transmitted by the wireless communication module. In other embodiments, the image data may not undergo compression or other processing before transmission. The transmitted image data can be displayed on the control terminal 30 so that the user who operates the user terminal can see the image data and/or interact with the control terminal 30 based on the image data.
拍摄装置20可以对捕获的影像数据进行预处理。对影像数据进行预处理的过程中可以采用硬件、软件或者两者的结合。硬件可以包括现场可编程门阵列(Field-Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)等。具体地,可以在捕获到影像数据后对未处理的影像数据执行预处理,以进行杂点去除、增强对比度、尺度空间表示等。The photographing device 20 may preprocess the captured image data. In the process of preprocessing the image data, hardware, software or a combination of the two can be used. The hardware may include Field-Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) and so on. Specifically, after the image data is captured, the unprocessed image data can be pre-processed to perform noise removal, contrast enhancement, scale space representation, and the like.
图2为本公开另一实施例提供的图像处理方法、图像处理装置和图像处理系统的应用场景。Fig. 2 is an application scenario of an image processing method, image processing device, and image processing system provided by another embodiment of the present disclosure.
如图2所示,在该场景中可以包括拍摄装置20、控制终端30和姿态调整装置40。其中,姿态调整装置40可以是用于调整拍摄装置20的姿态的设备,如云台等,来调整拍摄装置20的位姿。控制终端30可以是手机、平板电脑、笔记本、台式机、遥控器等电子设备,以实现对姿态调整装置40、拍 摄装置20的遥控控制。例如,拍摄装置20可以搭载在为云台的姿态调整装置40上。拍摄装置20可以包括变焦镜头,以执行拍摄任务。变焦镜头可以是相机常规拍摄功能对应的镜头。例如,变焦镜头在低焦距下可以用于获取环境中较完整的画面,变焦镜头的高焦距下可以用于获取高清细节,姿态调整装置40可以用于调整拍摄装置20的拍摄角度,并且使得拍摄装置20的运动平稳且无漂移。控制终端30可以用于控制姿态调整装置40的运动。控制终端30还可以获取拍摄装置20返回的拍摄画面,供用户查看。此外,控制终端30还可以获取用户对拍摄装置20的控制指令,并将该控制指令发送给拍照装置。控制指令例如可以是控制拍摄装置20的变焦镜头的变焦倍数的指令,或者可以是控制拍摄装置20的变焦镜头的拍照范围的指令等,或者可以是查看局部清晰照片的指令等。As shown in FIG. 2, this scene may include a photographing device 20, a control terminal 30, and a posture adjustment device 40. Wherein, the posture adjusting device 40 may be a device for adjusting the posture of the photographing device 20, such as a pan/tilt, etc., to adjust the posture of the photographing device 20. The control terminal 30 may be an electronic device such as a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a notebook, a desktop computer, a remote control, etc., to realize remote control of the posture adjustment device 40 and the photographing device 20. For example, the imaging device 20 may be mounted on a posture adjustment device 40 which is a pan/tilt. The photographing device 20 may include a zoom lens to perform photographing tasks. The zoom lens may be a lens corresponding to the conventional shooting function of the camera. For example, a zoom lens can be used to obtain a more complete picture in the environment at a low focal length, and a high focal length of the zoom lens can be used to obtain high-definition details. The movement of the device 20 is smooth and without drift. The control terminal 30 can be used to control the movement of the posture adjustment device 40. The control terminal 30 can also obtain the shooting screen returned by the shooting device 20 for the user to view. In addition, the control terminal 30 can also obtain a user's control instruction on the photographing device 20, and send the control instruction to the photographing device. The control instruction may be, for example, an instruction to control the zoom factor of the zoom lens of the photographing device 20, or may be an instruction to control the photographing range of the zoom lens of the photographing device 20, or may be an instruction to view a partially clear photo, or the like.
以安防场景为例进行介绍。用户可以在控制终端30设置监控任务,该监控任务可以包括使用多种焦距获取指定时间段、指定区域的影像的任务。例如,在早晨9点获取如图2所示的场景的图像(如在低焦距下获取的图像),以及该图像中重点监控对象所在区域的局部图像(如在高焦距下获取的图像)。这样便于用户基于拍摄装置20获取的图像进行状态监测等。可以理解,设计应用不限于安防场景,安防场景是针对固定范围的拍摄,此外,也可以为针对移动范围的拍摄,例如,通过可移动平台进行不同场景的拍摄。Take the security scene as an example to introduce. The user may set a monitoring task on the control terminal 30, and the monitoring task may include the task of acquiring images in a specified time period and a specified area using multiple focal lengths. For example, at 9 o'clock in the morning, an image of the scene as shown in FIG. 2 (such as an image acquired at a low focal length), and a partial image of the area where the key monitoring object is located in the image (such as an image acquired at a high focal length) is acquired at 9 o'clock in the morning. In this way, it is convenient for the user to perform state monitoring and the like based on the image acquired by the photographing device 20. It can be understood that the design application is not limited to security scenes. The security scenes are shooting in a fixed range. In addition, they can also be shooting in a moving range, for example, shooting in different scenes through a movable platform.
此外,用户可以随时使用多种焦距获取当前时间点、特定区域的影像。例如,用户在发现如图2所示的场景中可能存在异常时,则可以及时控制拍摄装置20对可能存在异常的区域进行拍摄,以进行状态跟踪等。In addition, users can use multiple focal lengths to obtain images at the current point in time and in a specific area at any time. For example, when the user finds that there may be an abnormality in the scene as shown in FIG. 2, he can control the photographing device 20 to photograph the area where the abnormality may exist in time for state tracking and the like.
本公开的实施例中,拍摄装置20也可以通过有线连接方式或无线连接方式(例如基于WiFi或射频通信的无线连接方式等)与上述控制终端30建立通信连接。控制终端30可以安装用于控制拍摄装置20的应用软件,用户可以通过该应用软件在控制终端30的显示界面中查看拍照装置返回的拍摄画面,以及提供用户与控制终端30、拍摄装置20的交互接口。拍摄装置20 包括图像传感器,以捕获影像信息。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the photographing device 20 may also establish a communication connection with the above-mentioned control terminal 30 through a wired connection or a wireless connection (for example, a wireless connection based on WiFi or radio frequency communication, etc.). The control terminal 30 can install application software for controlling the shooting device 20, and the user can view the shooting screen returned by the shooting device on the display interface of the control terminal 30 through the application software, and provide the user with the interaction between the control terminal 30 and the shooting device 20 interface. The photographing device 20 includes an image sensor to capture image information.
接下来结合图3~图17对图像处理方法进行示例性说明。Next, an exemplary description of the image processing method will be given with reference to FIGS. 3-17.
图3为本公开实施例提供的图像处理方法的流程示意图。FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of an image processing method provided by an embodiment of the disclosure.
如图3所示,该图像处理方法可以包括操作S301~操作S305。需要说明的是,上述操作可以在多种具有运算能力的电子设备上进行,如可以在无人飞行器、相机、云台、云台相机、控制终端等中至少一种上执行。其中,云台相机是指包括云台和相机的设备,云台与相机为非快拆连接。As shown in FIG. 3, the image processing method may include operations S301 to S305. It should be noted that the above operations can be performed on a variety of electronic devices with computing capabilities, for example, can be performed on at least one of an unmanned aerial vehicle, a camera, a pan/tilt, a pan/tilt camera, and a control terminal. Among them, the pan/tilt camera refers to the equipment including the pan/tilt and the camera, and the pan/tilt and the camera are connected by a non-quick release.
以下具有云台相机(拍摄端)和控制终端(控制端)的系统为例进行说明。在一个实施例中,操作S301~操作S305在云台相机上执行。在另一个实施例中,操作S301~操作S305在控制终端上执行。在另一个实施例中,操作S301~操作S305中至少部分在云台相机上执行,其余部分在控制终端上执行。对于分别在不同的电子设备上执行操作S301~操作S305中部分的场景中,不同的电子设备之间可以通过通信的方式互传操作所需的数据、用户操作、中间操作结果和最终操作结果等。The following is an example of a system with a pan/tilt camera (shooting terminal) and a control terminal (control terminal). In one embodiment, operations S301 to S305 are performed on the pan-tilt camera. In another embodiment, operations S301 to S305 are performed on the control terminal. In another embodiment, at least part of operations S301 to S305 are performed on the pan-tilt camera, and the rest are performed on the control terminal. For the scenarios where parts of operations S301 to S305 are performed on different electronic devices, different electronic devices can communicate with each other the data required for the operation, user operations, intermediate operation results, and final operation results, etc. .
在执行上述操作S301~操作S305的过程中,所需用到的数据、用户操作等,可以通过特定的传感器采集,如通过图像传感器采集图像数据,通过触控屏采集用户操作等。In the process of performing the above operations S301 to S305, the required data and user operations can be collected by a specific sensor, such as image data collected by an image sensor, and user operations collected by a touch screen.
在操作S301,获得当前姿态角下与第一焦距对应的第一最大视角区域,并且获得与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域。In operation S301, a first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length under the current attitude angle is obtained, and a second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length is obtained.
在本实施例中,与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域是基于姿态调整装置(如云台)的最大可转动角度确定的。当前姿态角下与第一焦距对应的第一最大视角区域与相机的位姿相关。以下置安装在无人机上的相机为例进行示例性说明,该相机通过云台安装在无人机上,通过云台调整相机的姿态。In this embodiment, the second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length is determined based on the maximum rotatable angle of the posture adjustment device (such as a pan-tilt). The first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length under the current attitude angle is related to the pose of the camera. Take a camera installed on the drone as an example for illustrative description. The camera is installed on the drone through a pan-tilt, and the attitude of the camera is adjusted through the pan-tilt.
在一个实施例中,由于云台在正常下置安装时的俯仰角的偏转范围包括第一范围,如(-90,30),偏航角的偏转范围包括第二范围,如(-300,300)。为了避免云台控制相机朝下拍摄时造成的图片“米”字型排列,需要对利用 第二焦距进行拍照时的云台的偏航角和俯仰角的可调整范围进行限制。例如,该最大可调整范围可由云台的最大转动角度决定。In one embodiment, since the deflection range of the pitch angle of the gimbal in the normal downward installation includes the first range, such as (-90, 30), the deflection range of the yaw angle includes the second range, such as (-300, 300). In order to avoid the “meter” arrangement of the picture when the gimbal controls the camera to shoot downwards, it is necessary to limit the adjustable range of the gimbal's yaw angle and pitch angle when taking pictures with the second focal length. For example, the maximum adjustable range can be determined by the maximum rotation angle of the pan/tilt.
图4为本公开实施例提供的与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域在垂直向的范围示意图。如图4所示,设定第二焦距下云台的俯仰角的偏转范围包括第一范围是(MIN、MAX),则可以确定与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域包括:
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000001
其中,
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000002
是与第二焦距对应的视角区域的垂直向大小。相应地,设定第一焦距下云台的俯仰角的偏转范围包括第二范围是(MIN、MAX)(由于可以通过同一个云台控制与第一焦距对应的拍照装置和与第二焦距对应的拍照装置,第一范围和第二范围可以相同),则可以确定与第一焦距对应的第一最大视角区域包括:
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000003
其中,
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000004
是与第一焦距对应的视角区域的垂直向大小。
4 is a schematic diagram of a vertical range of a second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to a second focal length provided by an embodiment of the disclosure. As shown in FIG. 4, if the deflection range of the pitch angle of the pan/tilt at the second focal length is set to include the first range being (MIN, MAX), it can be determined that the second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length includes:
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000001
in,
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000002
Is the vertical size of the viewing area corresponding to the second focal length. Correspondingly, setting the deflection range of the pitch angle of the pan/tilt at the first focal length includes the second range (MIN, MAX) (because the camera device corresponding to the first focal length and the camera corresponding to the second focal length can be controlled through the same pan/tilt In the photographing device, the first range and the second range may be the same), it can be determined that the first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length includes:
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000003
in,
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000004
Is the vertical size of the viewing area corresponding to the first focal length.
当相距处于某个当前姿态角(cur_pitch)时,则第一焦距对应的第一最大视角区域可以表示为
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000005
When the distance is at a certain current attitude angle (cur_pitch), the first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length can be expressed as
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000005
当前姿态角下与第一焦距对应的第一最大视角区域可以为相机在当前姿态角下的与第一焦距对应的第一视角区域,相机可以在第一焦距下捕获该第一视角区域的图像。The first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length at the current attitude angle may be the first viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length of the camera at the current attitude angle, and the camera may capture an image of the first viewing angle area at the first focal length .
需要说明的是,第二焦距包括以下任意一种:固定焦距(如具有固定焦距的相机的焦距)、预设焦距(如预设的拍摄任务中指定的焦距)、基于焦距算法确定的焦距(例如,基于用户使用的历史焦距数据确定的)、基于传感器确定的焦距和用户选定的焦距(例如,在显示界面上显示焦距选取组件,用户通过点击按钮、滑动焦距选取条、输入文本等方式选定焦距)。其中,基于传感器确定的焦距包括:基于距离信息确定的焦距,距离信息是通过激光测距仪确定的。例如,可以在相机、云台或无人机上设置激光测距仪以确定适用的焦距。It should be noted that the second focal length includes any of the following: fixed focal length (such as the focal length of a camera with a fixed focal length), preset focal length (such as the focal length specified in the preset shooting task), and the focal length determined based on the focal length algorithm ( For example, determined based on the historical focal length data used by the user), based on the focal length determined by the sensor and the focal length selected by the user (for example, the focal length selection component is displayed on the display interface, and the user clicks the button, slides the focal length selection bar, enters text, etc. Select focal length). Wherein, the focal length determined based on the sensor includes: the focal length determined based on distance information, and the distance information is determined by a laser rangefinder. For example, a laser rangefinder can be set on a camera, pan/tilt or drone to determine the applicable focal length.
在操作S303,将第一最大视角区域和第二最大视角区域进行比较。例如, 比较第一最大视角区域是否包括第二最大视角区域,或者比较第二最大视角区域是否包括第一最大视角区域。又例如,比较第一最大视角区域的上限和第二最大视角区域的上限,比较第一最大视角区域的下限和第二最大视角区域的下限,比较第一最大视角区域的左限和第二最大视角区域的左限,比较第一最大视角区域的右限和第二最大视角区域的右限。In operation S303, the first maximum viewing angle area and the second maximum viewing angle area are compared. For example, comparing whether the first maximum viewing angle area includes the second maximum viewing angle area, or comparing whether the second maximum viewing angle area includes the first maximum viewing angle area. For another example, compare the upper limit of the first maximum angle of view area and the upper limit of the second maximum angle of view area, compare the lower limit of the first maximum angle of view area and the lower limit of the second maximum angle of view area, compare the left limit of the first maximum angle of view area and the second maximum For the left limit of the viewing angle area, compare the right limit of the first maximum viewing angle area and the right limit of the second maximum viewing angle area.
在操作S305,根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,以便于获取待处理区域在第二焦距下的至少一个第二图像,第一图像是在第一焦距下获取的。其中,第二焦距大于第一焦距。In operation S305, the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image is determined according to the comparison result, so as to obtain at least one second image of the area to be processed under the second focal length, the first image being obtained under the first focal length . Wherein, the second focal length is greater than the first focal length.
在本实施例中,可以基于比较结果确定待处理区域在与第一最大视角区域对应的第一图像中的可选范围,与该可选范围对应的第一图像中的区域可以基于第二焦距进行拍摄。In this embodiment, the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image corresponding to the first maximum viewing angle area may be determined based on the comparison result, and the area in the first image corresponding to the selectable range may be based on the second focal length Take a shot.
在一个实施例中,如果与第一焦距对应的第一最大视角区域被包括在与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域之内,则确定可以基于第二焦距对第一最大视角区域进行拍照。即,可选范围的上下边界为第一最大视角区域的上下边界,可选范围的取值为(0.0,1.0)(如表示可选范围的上边界与第一最大视角区域的上边界的取值之比为0%至100%,可选范围的下边界与第一最大视角区域的下边界的取值之比为0%至100%)。In one embodiment, if the first maximum angle of view area corresponding to the first focal length is included in the second maximum angle of view area corresponding to the second focal length, it is determined that the first maximum angle of view area can be photographed based on the second focal length . That is, the upper and lower boundaries of the selectable range are the upper and lower boundaries of the first maximum viewing angle area, and the value of the selectable range is (0.0, 1.0) (for example, the upper boundary of the selectable range and the upper boundary of the first maximum viewing angle area are taken The value ratio is 0% to 100%, and the value ratio of the lower boundary of the selectable range to the lower boundary of the first maximum viewing angle area is 0% to 100%).
在另一个实施例中,如果第一最大视角区域的上边界超出第二最大视角区域的上边界,则需要计算可选范围的上限。In another embodiment, if the upper boundary of the first maximum viewing angle area exceeds the upper boundary of the second maximum viewing angle area, the upper limit of the selectable range needs to be calculated.
在另一个实施例中,如果第一最大视角区域的下边界超出第二最大视角区域的下边界,则需要计算可选范围的下限。In another embodiment, if the lower boundary of the first maximum viewing angle area exceeds the lower boundary of the second maximum viewing angle area, the lower limit of the selectable range needs to be calculated.
在另一个实施例中,如果第一最大视角区域的左边界超出第二最大视角区域的左边界,则需要计算可选范围的左限。In another embodiment, if the left boundary of the first maximum viewing angle area exceeds the left boundary of the second maximum viewing angle area, the left limit of the selectable range needs to be calculated.
在另一个实施例中,如果第一最大视角区域的右边界超出第二最大视角区域的右边界,则需要计算可选范围的右限。In another embodiment, if the right boundary of the first maximum viewing angle area exceeds the right boundary of the second maximum viewing angle area, the right limit of the selectable range needs to be calculated.
在另一个实施例中,为了便于用户直观地看到第一最大视角区域和第二 最大视角区域之间的关系,进而选取恰当的待处理区域,该方法应用于拍摄端的控制端时,还可以包括如下操作,显示可选范围的多个边界中的至少一个。例如,可以在显示界面中显示可选范围的一个或多个边界。又例如,待处理区域的边界中超出可选范围时,可以在显示界面中显示被超出的可选范围的边界。又例如,可以在显示界面中显示待处理区域的边界中超出可选范围的边界。又例如,非可选范围与可选范围可以区别显示,如通过透明度或颜色进行区别显示。In another embodiment, in order for the user to intuitively see the relationship between the first maximum angle of view area and the second maximum angle of view area, and then select an appropriate area to be processed, when the method is applied to the control end of the shooting end, it can also The following operations are included to display at least one of the multiple boundaries of the selectable range. For example, one or more boundaries of the selectable range can be displayed in the display interface. For another example, when the boundary of the area to be processed exceeds the selectable range, the boundary of the exceeded selectable range may be displayed on the display interface. For another example, the boundary beyond the selectable range among the boundaries of the area to be processed may be displayed on the display interface. For another example, the non-selectable range and the selectable range can be displayed differently, such as by transparency or color.
图5-图10为本公开实施例提供的控制终端显示界面示意图。Figures 5 to 10 are schematic diagrams of the display interface of the control terminal provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure.
如图5所示,根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围可以包括如下操作,如果根据比较结果确定第二最大视角区域S2包括第一最大视角区域S1,则确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围为第一图像中的任意区域。As shown in FIG. 5, determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result may include the following operations. If it is determined according to the comparison result that the second maximum viewing angle area S2 includes the first maximum viewing angle area S1, then determining the area to be processed The selectable range of the area in the first image is any area in the first image.
例如,如果
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000006
则上边界1t_piont_y=0.0。如果
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000007
则下边界rb_piont_y=1.0。
For example, if
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000006
Then the upper boundary 1t_piont_y=0.0. if
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000007
Then the lower boundary rb_piont_y=1.0.
如图6所示,根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围可以包括如下操作,如果根据比较结果确定第二最大视角区域S2包括部分第一最大视角区域S1,则确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围为第一最大视角区域和第二最大视角区域的重叠区域。如图6中阴影部分为第一最大视角区域和第二最大视角区域的重叠区域。As shown in FIG. 6, determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result may include the following operations. If it is determined according to the comparison result that the second maximum viewing angle area S2 includes part of the first maximum viewing angle area S1, then determining The selectable range of the processing area in the first image is the overlap area of the first maximum viewing angle area and the second maximum viewing angle area. The shaded area in FIG. 6 is the overlapping area of the first maximum viewing angle area and the second maximum viewing angle area.
如图7所示,当前姿态角是当前俯仰角,根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围可以包括如下操作,如果根据比较结果确定第一最大视角区域S1的第一上限超出第二最大视角区域S2的第二上限,则基于第一上限、第二上限和与第一焦距对应的垂直方向视角区域,确定可选范围在第一最大视角区域的可选上限(上边界)。As shown in FIG. 7, the current attitude angle is the current pitch angle, and determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result may include the following operations. If the first upper limit of the first maximum viewing angle area S1 is determined according to the comparison result Beyond the second upper limit of the second maximum viewing angle area S2, based on the first upper limit, the second upper limit, and the vertical viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length, the selectable range is determined to be the upper limit (upper boundary) of the first maximum viewing angle area. ).
例如,如果
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000008
则上边界
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000009
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000010
For example, if
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000008
Upper boundary
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000009
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000010
如图8所示,当前姿态角是当前俯仰角,根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围可以包括如下操作,如果根据比较结果确定第二最大视角区域的第二下限超出第一最大视角区域的第一下限,则基于第二下限、第一下限、和与第一焦距对应的垂直方向视角区域,确定可选范围在第一最大视角区域的可选下限(下边界)。As shown in Figure 8, the current attitude angle is the current pitch angle, and determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result may include the following operations. If it is determined according to the comparison result that the second lower limit of the second maximum viewing angle area exceeds The first lower limit of the first maximum viewing angle area, based on the second lower limit, the first lower limit, and the vertical viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length, determine the selectable lower limit (lower boundary) of the selectable range in the first maximum viewing angle area .
例如,如果
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000011
则下边界
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000012
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000013
For example, if
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000011
Lower boundary
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000012
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000013
如图9所示,当前姿态角是当前偏航角,根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围可以包括如下操作,如果根据比较结果确定第一最大视角区域的第一左限超出第二最大视角区域的第二左限,则基于第一左限、第二左限和与第一焦距对应的水平方向视角区域,确定可选范围在第一最大视角区域的可选左限。As shown in Figure 9, the current attitude angle is the current yaw angle, and determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result may include the following operations. If the limit exceeds the second left limit of the second maximum angle of view area, based on the first left limit, the second left limit and the horizontal angle of view area corresponding to the first focal length, the selectable range is determined to be the selectable left limit of the first maximum angle of view area. limit.
例如,可选范围的左限(可选左限)的算法可以参考上述关于计算可选范围的下限的算法,将
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000014
替换为与第一焦距对应的视角区域的水平向大小
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000015
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000016
替换为与第二焦距对应的视角区域的水平向大小
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000017
即可。
For example, the algorithm for the left limit (optional left limit) of the selectable range can refer to the algorithm for calculating the lower limit of the selectable range.
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000014
Replace with the horizontal size of the field of view corresponding to the first focal length
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000015
will
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000016
Replaced with the horizontal size of the viewing area corresponding to the second focal length
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000017
That's it.
如图10所示,当前姿态角是当前偏航角,根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围可以包括如下操作,如果根据比较结果确定第二最大视角区域的第二右限超出第一最大视角区域的第一右限,则基于第二右限、第一右限、和与第一焦距对应的水平方向视角区域,确定可选范围在第一最大视角区域的可选右限。As shown in Figure 10, the current attitude angle is the current yaw angle, and determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result may include the following operations. If the limit exceeds the first right limit of the first maximum viewing angle area, based on the second right limit, the first right limit, and the horizontal viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length, determine the selectable range in the first maximum viewing angle area. Right limit.
例如,可选范围的右限的算法可以参考上述关于计算可选范围的上限的算法,将
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000018
替换为与第一焦距对应的视角区域的水平向大小
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000019
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000020
替换为与第二焦距对应的视角区域的水平向大小
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000021
即可。
For example, the algorithm for the right limit of the selectable range can refer to the above-mentioned algorithm for calculating the upper limit of the selectable range.
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000018
Replace with the horizontal size of the field of view corresponding to the first focal length
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000019
will
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000020
Replaced with the horizontal size of the viewing area corresponding to the second focal length
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000021
That's it.
在另一个实施例中,在根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可 选范围之后,该方法还可以进一步包括如下操作。In another embodiment, after determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result, the method may further include the following operations.
首先,确定待处理区域,其中,第二最大视角区域包括待处理区域。例如,可以在控制端接收用户输入的待处理区域,或者,在拍照装置或控制终端基于图像识别算法确定待处理区域。其中,待处理区域应当被包括在第二最大视角区域之内,以避免出现在第二焦距下对待处理区域进行拍照得到的多个第二图像,无法覆盖待处理区域的完整图像(如拼接后形成“米”字型图像)。First, determine the area to be processed, where the second largest viewing angle area includes the area to be processed. For example, the to-be-processed area input by the user may be received at the control terminal, or the to-be-processed area may be determined based on the image recognition algorithm at the photographing device or the control terminal. Among them, the area to be processed should be included in the second maximum viewing angle area to avoid multiple second images obtained by taking pictures of the area to be processed under the second focal length, which cannot cover the complete image of the area to be processed (such as after stitching) Form a "m" font image).
在一个具体实施中,以用户输入的方式确定待处理区域为例进行说明。当用户在控制终端输入待处理区域时,需要控制终端或拍照装置(由控制终端将用户输入的待处理区域发送给拍照装置)确定用户输入的候选待处理区域是否超出可选范围。其中,待处理区域可以为用户从控制终端的显示界面中输入的类似框型的区域,还可以是用户输入的多个坐标构成的区域,还可以是用户输入的多个点构成的区域。In a specific implementation, the area to be processed is determined by way of user input as an example for description. When the user inputs the area to be processed in the control terminal, the control terminal or camera device (the control terminal sends the area to be processed by the user to the camera device) is required to determine whether the candidate area to be processed input by the user exceeds the selectable range. The area to be processed may be a frame-like area input by the user from the display interface of the control terminal, an area formed by multiple coordinates input by the user, or an area formed by multiple points input by the user.
例如,在确定待处理区域之前,该方法还可以包括如下操作。可以由控制终端或拍照装置获取候选待处理区域(如通过算法得到的人物图像区域、景点图像区域等,还可以是根据预设任务等确定的重点监控区域等),相应地,确定待处理区域包括:如果确定候选待处理区域未超出可选范围,则确定候选待处理区域为待处理区域。此外,为了便于用户输入合适的候选待处理区域,如避免候选待处理区域超出可选范围,可以在控制终端输出提示信息。例如,在控制终端的显示界面上展示可选范围作为提示信息。另外,在获取候选待处理区域之后,该方法还可以包括:如果确定候选待处理区域超出可选范围,则可以在控制终端输出提示信息。例如,在用户输入的候选待处理区域超出可选范围时,在控制终端上输出提示信息,提示信息包括但不限于:图像信息、文本信息、声音信息和体感信息等,如当候选待处理区域的下边界超出可选范围的下限时,则在控制终端的显示界面中显示可选范围的下限。其中,可以理解,当在控制终端的显示界面上展示可选范围时,显示界面中 第一图像上除可选范围以外的其它区域不能被选择,即限定用户只能在可选范围内选择,也即在这种情况下下,获取的候选待处理区域即为待处理区域,无需做进一步候选待处理区域是否超出可选范围的判断。For example, before determining the area to be processed, the method may further include the following operations. The control terminal or camera device can obtain the candidate to-be-processed area (such as the person image area, the scenic spot image area, etc. obtained through the algorithm, or the key monitoring area determined according to the preset task, etc.), and accordingly, determine the to-be-processed area Including: if it is determined that the candidate to-be-processed area does not exceed the selectable range, then the candidate to-be-processed area is determined to be the to-be-processed area. In addition, in order to facilitate the user to input a suitable candidate to-be-processed area, such as to prevent the candidate to-be-processed area from exceeding the selectable range, a prompt message may be output on the control terminal. For example, the selectable range is displayed as the prompt information on the display interface of the control terminal. In addition, after obtaining the candidate to-be-processed area, the method may further include: if it is determined that the candidate to-be-processed area is beyond the selectable range, outputting prompt information at the control terminal. For example, when the candidate to-be-processed area input by the user exceeds the selectable range, prompt information is output on the control terminal. The prompt information includes but is not limited to: image information, text information, sound information, and somatosensory information, such as when the candidate to-be-processed area When the lower limit of the selectable range exceeds the lower limit of the selectable range, the lower limit of the selectable range is displayed on the display interface of the control terminal. Among them, it can be understood that when the selectable range is displayed on the display interface of the control terminal, other areas on the first image in the display interface other than the selectable range cannot be selected, that is, the user is restricted to only select within the selectable range. That is, in this case, the obtained candidate to-be-processed area is the to-be-processed area, and there is no need to further determine whether the candidate to-be-processed area exceeds the selectable range.
在一个具体实施中,以基于图像识别算法确定待处理区域为例进行说明,基于图像识别算法确定待处理区域可以包括:对第一图像进行图像识别,确定待处理对象,将待处理对象所在区域作为待处理区域。其中,上述图像识别过程中可以采用多种合适的影像识别技术,如包括基于CAD模型(CAD-like)的物体识别方法(边缘侦测(edge detection),基本要素(primal sketch)),基于外表(apprearance-based)的识别方法(如边缘匹配(edge matching),分治(divide-conquer)搜索算法,灰度值匹配(greyscale matching),倾斜度匹配(gradient matching),感受域直方图(historgrams of receptive field response)、或者大模型(1arge model bases)等),基于特征(feature-based)的识别方法(如解释树(interpretation tree),假定及测试(hypothesizing-testing),姿势一致(pose consistency),姿势聚类(pose clustering),恒常性(invariance),几何散列法(geometric hashing),尺度不变特征转换(Scale-invariant feature transform,SIFT),基于快速鲁棒性特征(speeded up robust feature,SURF),基因演算法(genetic algorithms)等。In a specific implementation, the determination of the area to be processed based on the image recognition algorithm is taken as an example. The determination of the area to be processed based on the image recognition algorithm may include: As the area to be processed. Among them, a variety of suitable image recognition technologies can be used in the above-mentioned image recognition process, such as CAD-like object recognition methods (edge detection, primal sketch), and appearance (apprearance-based) recognition methods (such as edge matching, divide-conquer search algorithm, grayscale matching, gradient matching, historgrams) of receptive field response, or large model (1arge model bases, etc.), feature-based recognition methods (such as interpretation tree, hypothesizing-testing), pose consistency ), pose clustering, invariance, geometric hashing, scale-invariant feature transform (SIFT), based on fast and robust features (speeded up robust) feature, SURF), genetic algorithms (genetic algorithms), etc.
在另一个具体实施中,以基于预设任务和图像识别算法确定待处理区域为例进行说明。参考图2所示的安防场景,用户可以预先通过控制终端设置预设任务,如基于预设周期的图像采集任务。当该预设任务被触发时,则会基于预设任务控制拍照装置进行拍照。其中,预设任务可以包括多种任务参数,如任务周期、拍摄位姿序列信息(拍摄位姿序列信息可以是用户输入的,还可以是由控制终端根据用户输入的重点监控区域和焦距信息自动生成的)、报警相关信息等,其中,拍摄位姿序列信息可以包括拍照张数及每次拍照的位姿信息、焦距信息、感光度信息、快门信息等。报警相关信息包括但不限于:报警触发条件、报警方式等。利用图像识别算法进行识别的识别结果与 报警触发条件进行比对,以确定是否进行报警。例如,通过图像识别确定被监控的某个位置存在易燃易爆物品,则需要进行报警。又例如,在设备状态监测领域,仪表、紧固件等被监测对象通常固定在指定位置,基于预设任务和图像识别算法确定被监测对象的状态信息,进而基于被监测对象的状态信息确定是否进行报警。In another specific implementation, the area to be processed is determined based on a preset task and an image recognition algorithm as an example for description. With reference to the security scenario shown in Figure 2, the user can set a preset task through the control terminal in advance, such as an image collection task based on a preset period. When the preset task is triggered, the camera device will be controlled to take photos based on the preset task. Among them, the preset task can include a variety of task parameters, such as task period, shooting pose sequence information (the shooting pose sequence information can be input by the user, or it can be automatically controlled by the control terminal according to the key monitoring area and focal length information input by the user. Generated), alarm-related information, etc., where the shooting pose sequence information may include the number of photos taken and the pose information of each shot, focal length information, sensitivity information, shutter information, and the like. Alarm related information includes but is not limited to: alarm trigger conditions, alarm mode, etc. The recognition result of the recognition by the image recognition algorithm is compared with the alarm triggering conditions to determine whether to alarm. For example, if it is determined that there are flammable and explosive items in a certain location monitored through image recognition, an alarm is required. For another example, in the field of equipment condition monitoring, monitored objects such as meters and fasteners are usually fixed at designated locations, and the status information of the monitored object is determined based on preset tasks and image recognition algorithms, and then whether the monitored object is determined based on the status information of the monitored object Make an alarm.
然后,基于第二焦距和待处理区域确定拍照关联信息,以便基于拍照关联信息获取待处理区域在第二焦距下的至少一个第二图像。Then, the photographing related information is determined based on the second focal length and the to-be-processed area, so as to acquire at least one second image of the to-be-processed area at the second focal length based on the photographing-related information.
在本实施例中,拍照关联信息可以包括:拍摄位姿序列信息、相机拍摄关联信息和相机类型信息等。其中,拍摄位姿序列信息可以包括姿态调整装置关联信息。例如,姿态调整装置关联信息包括但不限于以下至少一种:姿态角序列信息、时间序列信息等。相机拍摄关联信息包括但不限于以下至少一种:曝光时长序列信息、感光度序列信息、去噪模式序列信息、输出格式序列信息、压缩模式序列信息等(需要说明的是,相机拍摄关联信息中各序列信息也可以是一个单值,如在拍摄位姿序列信息的各拍摄位姿下进行拍摄的拍照参数都相同)。例如,拍摄位姿序列信息是基于拍摄组合信息确定的,拍摄组合信息是基于第二焦距和待处理区域确定的。In this embodiment, the photographing related information may include: photographing pose sequence information, camera photographing related information, camera type information, and the like. Among them, the shooting pose sequence information may include posture adjustment device associated information. For example, the associated information of the attitude adjustment device includes but is not limited to at least one of the following: attitude angle sequence information, time sequence information, and the like. Camera shooting related information includes but is not limited to at least one of the following: exposure duration sequence information, sensitivity sequence information, denoising mode sequence information, output format sequence information, compression mode sequence information, etc. (It should be noted that the camera shooting related information Each sequence information may also be a single value, for example, the shooting parameters for shooting under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information are the same). For example, the shooting pose sequence information is determined based on the shooting combination information, and the shooting combination information is determined based on the second focal length and the area to be processed.
具体地,拍摄组合信息可以包括:拍照次数,以及每次拍照的待拍照区域。相应地,基于第二焦距和待处理区域确定拍照关联信息包括:基于第二焦距和待处理区域,确定拍照次数以及每次拍照的待拍照区域。基于待拍照区域确定拍摄位姿序列信息。其中,拍摄位姿序列信息中的每个拍摄位姿对应一个待拍照区域,以便在拍摄位姿序列信息的各个拍摄位姿下,以第二焦距拍摄与待拍照区域对应的第二图像。Specifically, the photographing combination information may include: the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph. Correspondingly, determining the photographing associated information based on the second focal length and the area to be processed includes: determining the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph based on the second focal length and the area to be processed. Determine the shooting pose sequence information based on the area to be photographed. Wherein, each shooting pose in the shooting pose sequence information corresponds to a to-be-photographed area, so that under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information, a second image corresponding to the to-be-photographed area is captured at the second focal length.
在一个具体实施例中,基于第二焦距和待处理区域,确定拍照次数以及每次拍照的待拍照区域可以包括如下操作。首先,基于图像传感器尺寸和第二焦距确定与第二焦距对应的视角区域。然后,基于待处理区域和与第二焦距对应的视角区域确定拍照次数,以及每次拍照的待拍照区域。其中,多个 待拍照区域构成的区域包括待处理区域。In a specific embodiment, based on the second focal length and the area to be processed, determining the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph may include the following operations. First, the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length is determined based on the size of the image sensor and the second focal length. Then, the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph are determined based on the area to be processed and the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length. Among them, the area formed by multiple areas to be photographed includes the area to be processed.
图11为本公开实施例提供的待处理区域划分示意图。FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of the division of a to-be-processed area provided by an embodiment of the disclosure.
如图11所示,相机的图像传感器的尺寸是固定的,在特定姿态的第二焦距(长焦距下获得的图像的尺寸小于短焦距下获得的图像的尺寸)下,图像传感器可以捕获到的图像在显示界面上的尺寸为:宽度W1,长度L1。待处理区域在显示界面上的尺寸为:宽度W2,长度L2。则待处理区域可以被划分为:
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000022
个区域,其中,
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000023
表示上取整。这样就可以确定需要拍照的次数,以使得在第二焦距下拍摄的多个第二图像可以完全覆盖在第一焦距下拍摄的第一图像中待处理区域的图像。此外,被划分得到的每个区域可以作为一个待拍照区域。
As shown in Figure 11, the size of the camera's image sensor is fixed. Under the second focal length in a specific posture (the size of the image obtained under the long focal length is smaller than the size of the image obtained under the short focal length), the image sensor can capture The size of the image on the display interface is: width W1, length L1. The size of the area to be processed on the display interface is: width W2, length L2. Then the area to be processed can be divided into:
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000022
Regions, of which,
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000023
Indicates rounding up. In this way, the number of photographs that need to be taken can be determined, so that the multiple second images taken at the second focal length can completely cover the image of the area to be processed in the first image taken at the first focal length. In addition, each divided area can be used as an area to be photographed.
为了确保在第二焦距下拍摄的多个第二图像可以完全覆盖在第一焦距下拍摄的第一图像中待处理区域的图像,可以为待拍照区域设置一定的冗余区域。例如,基于待处理区域和与第二焦距对应的视角区域确定拍照次数,以及每次拍照的待拍照区域可以包括:基于待处理区域、与第二焦距对应的视角区域和待拍照区域之间的图像重叠比例确定拍照次数,以及每次拍照的待拍照区域。其中,图像重叠比例可以是预设值,该图像重叠比例可以是分别针对一个或多个边长的(如包括宽度重叠比例、长度重叠比例中至少一种),还可以是针对面积的(如面积重叠比例)。In order to ensure that the multiple second images taken at the second focal length can completely cover the image of the area to be processed in the first image taken at the first focal length, a certain redundant area may be set for the area to be photographed. For example, determining the number of photos taken based on the area to be processed and the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length, and the area to be photographed for each photo may include: based on the area to be processed, the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length and the area to be photographed. The image overlap ratio determines the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph. Wherein, the image overlap ratio may be a preset value, the image overlap ratio may be for one or more side lengths (for example, including at least one of the width overlap ratio and the length overlap ratio), or it may be for area (for example, Area overlap ratio).
图12为本公开实施例提供的待拍照区域的示意图。FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of an area to be photographed according to an embodiment of the disclosure.
如图12所示,图示的待处理区域被分为9个待拍照区域,其中,相邻的待拍照区域之间存在特定的图像重叠比例。由于待拍照区域的水平向长度和垂直向长度可以不同,因此,可以设置水平向的图像重叠比例(overlap x),以及垂直向的图像重叠比例(overlap y)。当然,也可以为待拍照区域的水平向和垂直向设置相同的图像重叠比例。在其他实施例中,如待拍照区域为正方形,则可以设置水平向和垂直向重叠比例相同的图像重叠比例。 As shown in FIG. 12, the illustrated area to be processed is divided into 9 areas to be photographed, and there is a specific image overlap ratio between adjacent areas to be photographed. Since the horizontal length and the vertical length of the area to be photographed can be different, the horizontal image overlap ratio (overlap x ) and the vertical image overlap ratio (overlap y ) can be set. Of course, the same image overlap ratio can also be set for the horizontal and vertical directions of the area to be photographed. In other embodiments, if the area to be photographed is a square, an image overlap ratio with the same horizontal and vertical overlap ratio can be set.
在另一个实施例中,以具有两个镜头组的相机为例进行说明,如果第一 焦距是利用第一镜头组进行对焦的,第二焦距是利用第二镜头组进行对焦的,由于装配时,基线偏差是始终存在,需要对基线偏差进行校正,并且需要通过调整姿态调整装置使得第二镜头组的光轴对准原第一镜头的光轴以拍摄指定区域的图像。具体地,基于待拍照区域确定拍摄位姿序列信息可以包括:基于第一焦距下的相机当前位姿和第二焦距角度位置偏差确定与每次拍照的待拍照区域对应的拍摄位姿,并将确定的所有拍摄位姿的集合作为拍摄位姿序列信息。In another embodiment, a camera with two lens groups is used as an example for description. If the first focal length is used for focusing by the first lens group, the second focal length is used for focusing by the second lens group. The baseline deviation always exists, and the baseline deviation needs to be corrected, and the optical axis of the second lens group needs to be aligned with the optical axis of the original first lens by adjusting the posture adjustment device to take an image of a designated area. Specifically, determining the photographing pose sequence information based on the area to be photographed may include: determining the photographing pose corresponding to the area to be photographed for each photograph based on the current pose of the camera at the first focal length and the angular position deviation of the second focal length, and The set of all the determined shooting poses is used as the shooting pose sequence information.
在另一个实施例中,还可以同时考虑基线偏差和图像重叠比例,以提升第二图像的拍摄姿态的精确度。例如,基于待拍照区域确定拍摄位姿序列信息可以包括:基于第一焦距下的相机当前位姿、第二焦距角度位置偏差、与第二焦距对应的视角区域和待拍照区域之间的图像重叠比例确定与每次拍照的待拍照区域对应的拍摄位姿,并将确定的所有拍摄位姿的集合作为拍摄位姿序列信息。In another embodiment, the baseline deviation and the image overlap ratio can also be considered at the same time to improve the accuracy of the shooting posture of the second image. For example, determining the shooting pose sequence information based on the area to be photographed may include: based on the current pose of the camera at the first focal length, the angular position deviation of the second focal length, and the image overlap between the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length and the area to be photographed The ratio determines the shooting pose corresponding to the area to be photographed for each shot, and the set of all the determined shooting poses is used as the shooting pose sequence information.
其中,第二焦距角度位置偏差可以基于第一偏差、第二偏差和第三偏差确定。具体地,确定与第二焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置和与第一焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置之间的第一偏差,例如,指定位置可以为中心点。确定待处理区域的指定位置和与第一焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置之间的第二偏差。确定待拍照区域的指定位置与待处理区域的指定位置之间的第三偏差。这样就可以实现基于第一偏差、第二偏差和第三偏差确定待拍照区域与第一焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置之间的第二焦距角度位置偏差。这样可以通过控制云台使得相机从当前姿态角偏移上述第二焦距角度位置偏差,来实现针对待拍照区域进行拍照。Wherein, the deviation of the second focal length angle position may be determined based on the first deviation, the second deviation, and the third deviation. Specifically, the first deviation between the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length is determined, for example, the designated position may be the center point. The second deviation between the designated position of the area to be processed and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length is determined. Determine the third deviation between the designated position of the area to be photographed and the designated position of the area to be processed. In this way, the second focal length angular position deviation between the area to be photographed and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length can be determined based on the first deviation, the second deviation, and the third deviation. In this way, by controlling the pan-tilt so that the camera deviates from the current attitude angle of the above-mentioned second focal length angle position deviation, it is possible to take pictures of the area to be photographed.
以下以一个具体实施例来说明如何调整云台的姿态,来实现针对待处理区域的拍照。In the following, a specific embodiment is used to illustrate how to adjust the posture of the pan-tilt to realize the photographing of the area to be processed.
根据当前长焦相机的焦距与传感器(sensor)的尺寸信息,利用式(1)和式(2)分别计算出与第二焦距对应的水平视角(fov zx)的大小、与第二焦 距对应的垂直视角(fov zy)的大小。 According to the focal length of the current telephoto camera and the size information of the sensor, the horizontal angle of view (fov zx ) corresponding to the second focal length and the size corresponding to the second focal length are calculated using formulas (1) and (2). The size of the vertical viewing angle (fov zy ).
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000024
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000024
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000025
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000025
其中,W,H是sensor的宽和高,focal_length是第二焦距。Among them, W and H are the width and height of the sensor, and focal_length is the second focal length.
假设需要在第二焦距下针对待处理区域进行拍照,与待处理区域对应的在第一焦距下的视角区域的水平视角为(fov wx),与待处理区域对应的在第一焦距下的视角区域的垂直视角为(fov wy),为了保证在第二焦距下(如通过长焦镜头)拍摄的图像能够完全覆盖待处理区域,可以满足如式(3)和式(4)所示的条件。 Assuming that it is necessary to take a picture of the area to be processed at the second focal length, the horizontal angle of view at the first focal length corresponding to the area to be processed is (fov wx ), and the angle of view at the first focal length corresponding to the area to be processed The vertical viewing angle of the area is (fov wy ), in order to ensure that the image taken at the second focal length (such as through a telephoto lens) can completely cover the area to be processed, the conditions shown in equations (3) and (4) can be satisfied .
fov zx+(1-overlap x)*fov zx*(m-1)≥fov wx   式(3) fov zx +(1-overlap x )*fov zx *(m-1)≥fov wx formula (3)
fov zy+(1-overlap y)*fov zy*(n-1)≥fov wy   式(4) fov zy +(1-overlap y )*fov zy *(n-1)≥fov wy formula (4)
其中,overlap x是水平向的图像重叠比例,overlap y是垂直向的图像重叠比例,参考图12所示,即长度重叠比例和宽度重叠比例。m和n分别是水平向和垂直向需要拍摄的照片的张数,在实际使用中,overlap x可以是用户指定的,也可以是通过特殊规则,由算法计算得出的。 Among them, overlap x is the image overlap ratio in the horizontal direction, and overlap y is the image overlap ratio in the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. 12, that is, the length overlap ratio and the width overlap ratio. m and n are the number of photos that need to be taken horizontally and vertically respectively. In actual use, overlap x can be specified by the user or calculated by an algorithm through special rules.
为了消除如上所示的基线偏差,可以通过标定第一镜片组和第二镜片组之间的内参数、旋转矩阵与平移矩阵,计算出特定目标距离(一般情况下假设为无穷远)下二者的单应性(Homography)矩阵,然后计算出与第二焦距对应的视角区域的中心到与第一焦距对应的视角区域的中心之间的第一偏差。具体可以如式(5)至式(7)所示。In order to eliminate the baseline deviation as shown above, the internal parameters, rotation matrix and translation matrix between the first lens group and the second lens group can be calibrated to calculate the specific target distance (in general, it is assumed to be infinity). Then, calculate the first deviation from the center of the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length to the center of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length. Specifically, it can be as shown in formula (5) to formula (7).
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000026
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000026
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000027
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000027
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000028
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000028
假设待处理区域的中心的位置是(a,b),与第一焦距对应的视角区域的中心是(wide_center_x,wide_center_y),可以计算出待处理区域的中心相对于与第一焦距对应的视角区域的中心的第二偏差(offset_2 x,offset_2 y),具体可以采用式(8)和式(9)表示。 Assuming that the position of the center of the area to be processed is (a, b), and the center of the view area corresponding to the first focal length is (wide_center_x, wide_center_y), the center of the area to be processed can be calculated relative to the view area corresponding to the first focal length The second deviation (offset_2 x , offset_2 y ) of the center of, can be specifically expressed by equations (8) and (9).
offset_2 x=wide_center_x-a   式(8) offset_2 x = wide_center_x-a formula (8)
offset_2 y=wide_center_y-b   式(9) offset_2 y = wide_center_y-b equation (9)
在m和n确定后,可以计算出左上角第一个待拍照区域相对于待处理区域的中心的第三偏差(offset_3 x,offset_3 y)。 After m and n are determined, the third deviation (offset_3 x , offset_3 y ) of the first area to be photographed in the upper left corner relative to the center of the area to be processed can be calculated.
图13为本公开实施例提供的拍摄张数为奇数时的示意图,图14为本公开实施例提供的拍摄张数为偶数时的示意图。FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram when the number of shots provided by an embodiment of the disclosure is an odd number, and FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram when the number of shots provided by an embodiment of the disclosure is an even number.
第三偏差(offset_3 x,offset_3 y)可以采用如式(10)和式(11)进行计算。 The third deviation (offset_3 x , offset_3 y ) can be calculated using equations (10) and (11).
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000029
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000029
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000030
Figure PCTCN2020077217-appb-000030
其中,fov x-overlap x为去除重叠后水平视角,fov y-overlap y为去除重叠后垂直视角。 Among them, fov x -overlap x is the horizontal viewing angle after removing the overlap, and fov y -overlap y is the vertical viewing angle after removing the overlap.
将这些offset求和就得到了前面算出的m*n个待拍照区域中左上角的待拍照区域相对于当前位姿下第一镜片组的角度位置偏差。其中,当前位姿可以指相机当前的拍摄位姿角。可以基于该角度位置偏差控制云台调整相机的姿态,使得相机可以在第二焦距下针对上述m*n个待拍照区域中左上角的待拍照区域进行拍照。The sum of these offsets obtains the angular position deviation of the previously calculated m*n area to be photographed in the upper left corner of the area to be photographed relative to the first lens group in the current pose. Among them, the current pose may refer to the current shooting pose angle of the camera. The PTZ can be controlled to adjust the posture of the camera based on the angular position deviation, so that the camera can take a picture of the area to be photographed in the upper left corner of the m*n areas to be photographed under the second focal length.
具体地,可以通过式(12)和式(13)确定左上角的待拍照区域相对于当前位姿下第一镜片组的角度位置偏差。Specifically, the angular position deviation of the area to be photographed in the upper left corner with respect to the first lens group in the current pose can be determined by formulas (12) and (13).
offset x=offset_1 x+offset_2 x+offset_3 x   式(12) offset x =offset_1 x +offset_2 x +offset_3 x formula (12)
offset y=offset_1 y+offset_2 y+offset_3 y   式(13) offset y =offset_1 y +offset_2 y +offset_3 y formula (13)
例如,第一焦距由广角相机(包括第一镜片组)实现,第二焦距由长焦 相机(包括第二镜片组)实现。假设当前广角相机的位置为(yaw current,pitch current),则广角相机的左上角的待拍照区域对应的位置是(yaw target(1,1),pitch target(1,1)),可以通过式(14)和式(15)进行计算。 For example, the first focal length is realized by a wide-angle camera (including the first lens group), and the second focal length is realized by a telephoto camera (including the second lens group). Assuming that the current wide-angle camera position is (yaw current , pitch current ), the position corresponding to the area to be photographed in the upper left corner of the wide-angle camera is (yaw target (1, 1), pitch target (1, 1)), which can be obtained by (14) and formula (15) for calculation.
yaw target(1,1)=yaw current+offset x   式(14) yaw target (1, 1) = yaw current + offset x equation (14)
pitch target(1,1)=pitch current+offset y   式(15) pitch target (1, 1) = pitch current + offset y formula (15)
在得到广角相机左上角的照片对应的位置(yaw target,pitch target)后,结合当前的广角相机的视角区域(即与第一焦距对应的水平视角(fov zx,fov zy))以及(overlap x,overlap y),就可以得到m*n个待拍照区域中其他待拍照区域的位置。例如,可以通过式(16)和式(17)进行计算。 After obtaining the position (yaw target , pitch target ) corresponding to the photo in the upper left corner of the wide-angle camera, combine the current wide-angle camera's field of view (that is, the horizontal field of view corresponding to the first focal length (fov zx , fov zy )) and (overlap x , Overlap y ), the positions of other areas to be photographed in m*n areas to be photographed can be obtained. For example, it can be calculated by formula (16) and formula (17).
yaw target(m,n)=yaw target(1,1)+(1-overlap x)*fov zx*(m-1) yaw target (m,n)=yaw target (1,1)+(1-overlap x )*fov zx *(m-1)
                                             式(16)Formula (16)
pitch target(m,n)=pitch target(1,1)+(1-overlap y)*fov zy*(n-1) pitch target (m, n) = pitch target (1, 1) + (1-overlap y )*fov zy *(n-1)
                                            式(17)Formula (17)
通过以上操作即可确定出各待拍照区域相对于相机当前姿态的角度位置偏差,也即得到了拍摄位姿序列信息。Through the above operations, the angular position deviation of each area to be photographed relative to the current posture of the camera can be determined, and the photographing pose sequence information can be obtained.
在另一个实施例中,在基于待拍照区域确定拍摄位姿序列之后,该方法还可以包括如下操作:控制拍摄端在拍摄位姿序列信息的各个拍摄位姿下,以第二焦距拍摄与待拍照区域对应的第二图像。需要说明的是,该操作可以由控制终端执行,也可以是由拍摄端执行。例如,可以由控制终端向拍摄端发送拍摄指令。又例如,在得到拍摄位姿序列信息,拍摄端自动基于拍摄位姿序列信息进行拍摄,在此不做限定。In another embodiment, after the shooting pose sequence is determined based on the area to be photographed, the method may further include the following operations: controlling the shooting end to shoot at the second focal length under each shooting pose in the shooting pose sequence information. The second image corresponding to the photographing area. It should be noted that this operation can be performed by the control terminal or by the camera terminal. For example, the control terminal may send a shooting instruction to the shooting terminal. For another example, after obtaining the shooting pose sequence information, the shooting end automatically performs shooting based on the shooting pose sequence information, which is not limited here.
例如,拍摄端包括拍摄装置,控制拍摄端在拍摄位姿序列信息的各个拍摄位姿下,以第二焦距拍摄与待拍照区域对应的第二图像可以包括如下操作:通过姿态调整装置控制拍摄装置依次处于拍摄位姿序列信息中的各个拍摄位姿,并控制拍摄装置在各个拍摄位姿下,以第二焦距拍摄与待拍照区域分别对应的第二图像。例如,姿态调整装置设置在可移动平台上,姿态调整装置 可以为多轴云台,可移动平台可以为无人机。For example, the shooting end includes a shooting device, and controlling the shooting end to shoot the second image corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information may include the following operations: controlling the shooting device through the attitude adjustment device In each shooting pose in the shooting pose sequence information, the shooting device is controlled to shoot the second images respectively corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length in each shooting pose. For example, the attitude adjustment device is set on a movable platform, the attitude adjustment device can be a multi-axis pan/tilt, and the movable platform can be an unmanned aerial vehicle.
在一个具体实施例中,第一图像和第二图像是变焦拍摄装置分别在第一焦距和第二焦距下拍摄的。参考图2所示的安防场景,该照相机具有可变焦镜头,通过调整可变焦镜头的焦距以及调整照相机的姿态来获得第一图像和第二图像。In a specific embodiment, the first image and the second image are captured by a zoom camera at the first focal length and the second focal length, respectively. Referring to the security scene shown in FIG. 2, the camera has a zoom lens, and the first image and the second image are obtained by adjusting the focal length of the zoom lens and adjusting the posture of the camera.
在另一个具体实施例中,第一图像是第一拍摄装置拍摄的,第二图像是第二拍摄装置拍摄的。其中,第一拍摄装置的焦距至少部分与第二拍摄装置的焦距不同。例如,第一拍摄装置和第二拍摄装置是两个独立的拍摄装置,可以设置在同一个云台上,以使得第一拍摄装置和第二拍摄装置可以同步运动。又例如,第一拍摄装置和第二拍摄装置之间的距离固定,并且第一拍摄装置设置在第一云台上,第二拍摄装置设置在第二云台上,第一云台和第二云台可以同步运动。又例如,第一拍摄装置和第二拍摄装置封装在一个壳体中,共用一个图像传感器,第一拍摄装置的镜片组的光轴与第二拍摄装置的镜片组的光轴保持平行。In another specific embodiment, the first image is taken by a first photographing device, and the second image is taken by a second photographing device. Wherein, the focal length of the first photographing device is at least partially different from the focal length of the second photographing device. For example, the first photographing device and the second photographing device are two independent photographing devices, which can be set on the same pan-tilt, so that the first photographing device and the second photographing device can move synchronously. For another example, the distance between the first camera and the second camera is fixed, and the first camera is set on the first platform, the second camera is set on the second platform, and the first camera and the second camera are The pan/tilt can move synchronously. For another example, the first imaging device and the second imaging device are packaged in a housing and share an image sensor, and the optical axis of the lens group of the first imaging device and the optical axis of the lens group of the second imaging device are kept parallel.
在另一个具体实施例中,第一拍摄装置和第二拍摄装置中至少一个的焦距可调。例如,第一拍摄装置是固定焦距相机,第二拍摄装置是焦距可调相机。又例如,第一拍摄装置是焦距可调相机,第二拍摄装置是固定焦距相机。又例如,第一拍摄装置和第二拍摄装置都是焦距可调相机。采用两个拍摄装置进行拍摄相对于采用一个焦距可调的拍摄装置(如具有较大的焦距调整范围的高倍变焦镜头)进行拍摄,在应用到可移动平台(如无人机)上时,有助于降低因焦距调整导致镜片组的重心改变,进而导致如无人机的重心改变的影响。此外,还可以有效降低因采用高倍变焦镜头而导致的高成本。In another specific embodiment, the focal length of at least one of the first camera and the second camera is adjustable. For example, the first photographing device is a fixed focal length camera, and the second photographing device is an adjustable focal length camera. For another example, the first imaging device is an adjustable focal length camera, and the second imaging device is a fixed focal length camera. For another example, both the first imaging device and the second imaging device are cameras with adjustable focal lengths. Using two shooting devices for shooting is compared to using a shooting device with an adjustable focal length (such as a high-power zoom lens with a larger focal length adjustment range). When applied to a movable platform (such as a drone), there are It helps to reduce the influence of the change of the center of gravity of the lens group due to the adjustment of the focal length, which in turn leads to the change of the center of gravity of the drone. In addition, it can also effectively reduce the high cost caused by the use of high-power zoom lenses.
在另一个具体实施例中,第一拍摄装置是广角相机,第二拍摄装置是长焦相机。其中,长焦相机可以为焦距可调相机。该长焦相机的可调焦距范围可以根据相机成本等而定。此外,该长焦相机的可调焦距范围可以小于上述高倍变焦镜头的可调焦范围。例如,长焦相机的可调焦距范围位于高倍变焦 镜头的可调焦范围的大焦距一侧。In another specific embodiment, the first photographing device is a wide-angle camera, and the second photographing device is a telephoto camera. Among them, the telephoto camera may be a camera with an adjustable focal length. The adjustable focal length range of the telephoto camera can be determined according to the cost of the camera and so on. In addition, the adjustable focus range of the telephoto camera may be smaller than the adjustable focus range of the above-mentioned high-power zoom lens. For example, the adjustable focal length range of a telephoto camera is located on the larger focal length side of the adjustable focal range of a high-power zoom lens.
需要说明的是,上述说明的第一拍摄装置可以包括第一镜片组,第二拍摄装置可以包括第二镜片组。It should be noted that the first photographing device described above may include a first lens group, and the second photographing device may include a second lens group.
此外,为了便于用户查阅第一图像和第二图像,在控制拍摄端在拍摄位姿序列信息的各拍摄位姿下,以第二焦距拍摄与待拍照区域对应的第二图像之后,该方法还可以包括如下操作:关联地存储第一图像和第二图像。例如,SD卡存储HTML文件以及第一图像、第二图像,这样使得将SD卡耦接至个人电脑(PC)端,可以实现在PC端基于HTML文件显示第一图像、第二图像。其中,HTML文件可以包括第一图像和第二图像之间的映射关系。In addition, in order to facilitate the user to refer to the first image and the second image, after controlling the shooting end to shoot the second image corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information, the method also It may include the following operations: storing the first image and the second image in association. For example, the SD card stores the HTML file and the first image and the second image, so that the SD card is coupled to the personal computer (PC) side, and the first image and the second image can be displayed on the PC side based on the HTML file. Wherein, the HTML file may include the mapping relationship between the first image and the second image.
具体地,关联地存储第一图像和第二图像可以包括如下操作。首先,确定第二图像与待处理区域之间的第一映射关系,并且确定待处理区域与第一图像之间的第二映射关系。然后,存储第一图像、待处理区域、第二图像、第一映射关系和第二映射关系。其中,待处理区域可以被表示为范围信息等,如基于多个坐标确定的范围。Specifically, storing the first image and the second image in association may include the following operations. First, determine the first mapping relationship between the second image and the area to be processed, and determine the second mapping relationship between the area to be processed and the first image. Then, the first image, the area to be processed, the second image, the first mapping relationship, and the second mapping relationship are stored. Among them, the area to be processed may be expressed as range information, etc., such as a range determined based on multiple coordinates.
在一个具体实施例中,应用于拍摄端时,第二图像为未经处理的拍摄图像。例如,该第二图像为原始拍摄图像。这样便于用户在诸如电脑等终端上查阅原始拍摄图像。需要说明的是,为了提升显示效果,该原始拍摄图像可以经过降噪、对象识别、识别对象区域标记等预处理。In a specific embodiment, when applied to the shooting terminal, the second image is an unprocessed shooting image. For example, the second image is the original captured image. In this way, it is convenient for users to refer to the original photographed images on terminals such as computers. It should be noted that, in order to improve the display effect, the original captured image may undergo pre-processing such as noise reduction, object recognition, and recognition of object region marking.
在一个具体实施例中,应用于拍摄端的控制端时,第二图像为经处理后的拍摄图像,第二图像的分辨率小于未经处理的拍摄图像的分辨率。例如,可以对第二图像进行图像压缩,来减小第二图像占用的存储。或者,可以降低传输第二图像所占用的网络资源。例如,在无人机与控制终端的通信过程中,无人机侧传输有第二图像的缩略图,控制终端需要查阅具体的第二图像时,需要从无人机侧下载,传输被压缩后的第二图像时有助于降低网络资源消耗,并且有助于提升传输速率和用户指令响应速度。对第二图像进行图像压缩的过程可以发生在捕获到第二图像之后,还可以发生在接收到用于查看 第二图像的用户指令之后,还可以发生在接收到用于压缩第二图像的用户指令之后,在此不做限定。In a specific embodiment, when applied to the control terminal of the shooting terminal, the second image is a processed captured image, and the resolution of the second image is smaller than the resolution of the unprocessed captured image. For example, image compression may be performed on the second image to reduce the storage occupied by the second image. Alternatively, the network resources occupied by the transmission of the second image can be reduced. For example, in the communication process between the drone and the control terminal, the drone side transmits a thumbnail of the second image. When the control terminal needs to consult the specific second image, it needs to be downloaded from the drone side. After the transmission is compressed The second image is helpful to reduce network resource consumption, and helps to improve the transmission rate and user command response speed. The process of image compression on the second image may occur after the second image is captured, after receiving a user instruction for viewing the second image, or after receiving a user for compressing the second image After the instruction, there is no restriction here.
此外,变焦镜头在调整变焦倍数后可按照新的变焦倍数获取拍摄画面(如用户通过调整控制终端显示界面中的倍率调整组件改变第二焦距时),拍照装置可以实时地将变焦镜头获取的拍摄画面发送至控制终端,以便控制终端显示变焦镜头获取的画面,使用户可以直观地查看变焦镜头获取的画面的清晰度是否满足自己的需求。In addition, after adjusting the zoom factor, the zoom lens can obtain the shooting image according to the new zoom factor (for example, when the user changes the second focal length by adjusting the magnification adjustment component in the display interface of the control terminal), the camera device can real-time capture the shots acquired by the zoom lens The picture is sent to the control terminal, so that the control terminal displays the picture obtained by the zoom lens, so that the user can intuitively check whether the sharpness of the picture obtained by the zoom lens meets their own needs.
在另一个实施例中,上述方法还可以包括如下操作:如果接收到用于查看第二图像的操作指令,则从拍摄端获取第二图像对应的未经处理的拍摄图像。然后,显示第二图像对应的未经处理的拍摄图像。例如,在拍摄装置在第二焦距下拍摄到第二图像后,为了便于用户确认拍摄效果,可以由无人机侧将第二图像的压缩图发送给控制终端侧,以便进行展示。如果用户希望查看第二图像的原始拍摄图像,则可以通过控制终端侧向无人机侧(或其上的拍摄装置)发送用于查看第二图像的操作指令。无人机侧响应于用于查看第二图像的操作指令,向控制终端侧发送第二图像的原始拍摄图像。这样可以同时满足控制终端侧和无人机侧之间的信息交互速度,并且还可以满足用户针对第二图像的多种需求。In another embodiment, the above method may further include the following operation: if an operation instruction for viewing the second image is received, obtaining an unprocessed photographed image corresponding to the second image from the photographing terminal. Then, the unprocessed captured image corresponding to the second image is displayed. For example, after the camera captures the second image at the second focal length, in order to facilitate the user to confirm the shooting effect, the drone side may send the compressed image of the second image to the control terminal side for display. If the user wants to view the original photographed image of the second image, he can send an operation instruction for viewing the second image to the side of the drone (or the photographing device on it) through the control terminal side. In response to the operation instruction for viewing the second image, the drone side sends the original captured image of the second image to the control terminal side. In this way, the information interaction speed between the control terminal side and the drone side can be satisfied at the same time, and the multiple needs of the user for the second image can also be met.
另外,为了进一步提升用户查看针对待处理区域的图像的便捷度,在控制拍摄端在拍摄位姿序列的各拍摄位姿下,以第二焦距拍摄与待拍照区域(可以包括多个待拍照区域)对应的第二图像之后,该方法还可以包括如下操作。首先,获取第三图像,第三图像是基于第二图像合成的。然后,关联地存储第一图像和第三图像。其中,第三图像可以是利用多个第二图像合成的,如基于图像拼接技术合成的。对于拼接的多个第二图像之间的重叠图像部分,可以利用插值法使得拼接处更加自然。In addition, in order to further improve the convenience for users to view the image for the area to be processed, the control camera is used to shoot at the second focal length and the area to be photographed (which may include multiple areas to be photographed) under each shooting position of the shooting position sequence. ) After the corresponding second image, the method may further include the following operations. First, a third image is acquired, which is synthesized based on the second image. Then, the first image and the third image are stored in association. Wherein, the third image may be synthesized using multiple second images, for example, based on image stitching technology. For the overlapping image parts between the multiple second images that are stitched, interpolation can be used to make the stitching more natural.
接下来以通过广角镜头捕获第一图像,通过长焦镜头捕获第二图像的方式,结合控制终端的显示界面,对查看拍照结果进行说明。Next, the first image is captured through the wide-angle lens and the second image is captured through the telephoto lens, combined with the display interface of the control terminal, to illustrate the viewing of the photographing result.
图15-图17为本公开实施例提供的显示图像的示意图。Figures 15-17 are schematic diagrams of display images provided by embodiments of the disclosure.
如图15所示,控制终端的显示界面1501中显示的内容包括:在第一拍摄装置的当前姿态下,以第一焦距拍摄的第一图像。用户从第一图像中选取了待处理区域1502(被包括在与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域之内),并且设定了第二焦距。拍摄端或控制终端基于第二焦距对待处理区域1502进行划分,确定了四个待拍照区域,并且确定了四个待拍照区域的拍照关联信息。这样使得拍摄端可以基于拍照关联信息在第二焦距下分别对四个待拍照区域进行拍照,以得到四个超解析的第二图像。然后,可以将第一图像和第二图像进行关联存储,如存储在SD卡中。As shown in FIG. 15, the content displayed on the display interface 1501 of the control terminal includes: the first image captured at the first focal length under the current posture of the first camera. The user selects the area to be processed 1502 (included in the second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length) from the first image, and sets the second focal length. The photographing terminal or the controlling terminal divides the area to be processed 1502 based on the second focal length, determines four areas to be photographed, and determines photographing related information of the four areas to be photographed. In this way, the shooting end can respectively take pictures of the four areas to be photographed at the second focal length based on the photographing related information, so as to obtain four super-analyzed second images. Then, the first image and the second image can be associated and stored, such as stored in an SD card.
在一些可能的实施例中,显示界面1501还包括焦距调节组件1503、焦距信息等,以便于用户调整第二焦距。当前的第二焦距(ZOOM)为10倍焦距。此外,显示界面1501还可以包括变焦镜头的拍摄张数和/或拍摄时长。该拍摄信息随着变焦镜头的拍摄参数改变而改变。由此,广角镜头画面参数会相应发生变化,镜头参数联动变化。In some possible embodiments, the display interface 1501 further includes a focal length adjustment component 1503, focal length information, etc., so that the user can adjust the second focal length. The current second focal length (ZOOM) is 10 times the focal length. In addition, the display interface 1501 may also include the number of shots and/or the shooting duration of the zoom lens. The shooting information changes as the shooting parameters of the zoom lens change. As a result, the picture parameters of the wide-angle lens will change accordingly, and the lens parameters will change accordingly.
如图16所示,为将可读存储介质,如SD卡与电脑等终端设备进行耦接后,终端的显示器的显示界面1601。在显示第一图像时,可以显示标注信息1602,如与图15中待处理区域相对应的范围标记、存在关联存储的第二图像的文字标注信息等。当然,还可以显示第一图像的图像标识和格式信息(DJI00001.jpeg)。用户可以通过点击该标注信息1602或特定的功能组件来查看关联存储的第二图像,如终端可以基于HTML文件和标注信息1602确定用户所希望查看的第二图像,并进行显示。此外,用户可以通过特定操作隐藏该标注信息1602以保证观看效果。终端的显示器的显示界面1601还可以包括操作按钮1603,使得用户还可以对第一图像进行编辑、删除和分享等操作。As shown in FIG. 16, after coupling a readable storage medium, such as an SD card, to a terminal device such as a computer, a display interface 1601 of the terminal's display is shown. When the first image is displayed, annotation information 1602 may be displayed, such as the range mark corresponding to the area to be processed in FIG. 15, the text annotation information of the second image stored in association, and the like. Of course, the image identification and format information (DJI00001.jpeg) of the first image can also be displayed. The user can view the second image stored in association by clicking the annotation information 1602 or a specific functional component. For example, the terminal can determine the second image that the user wants to view based on the HTML file and the annotation information 1602, and display it. In addition, the user can hide the annotation information 1602 through a specific operation to ensure the viewing effect. The display interface 1601 of the terminal's display may also include an operation button 1603, so that the user can also perform operations such as editing, deleting, and sharing the first image.
需要说明的是,在用户需要打印第一图像或第二图像时,可以不打印标注信息。例如,在终端或无人机侧将第一图像或第二图像发送给打印设备时, 可以不发送HTML文件。It should be noted that when the user needs to print the first image or the second image, the label information may not be printed. For example, when sending the first image or the second image to the printing device on the terminal or drone side, the HTML file may not be sent.
如图17所示,为终端的显示器的显示界面1601。其中,可以显示当前显示的第二图像1701与第一图像之间的关系。如图17所示的第二图像1701是与第一图像的待处理区域对应的四张第二图像中的第一张(1 of 4)。用户还可以对第二图像1701进行编辑、删除和分享等操作。As shown in FIG. 17, it is a display interface 1601 of the display of the terminal. Among them, the relationship between the currently displayed second image 1701 and the first image can be displayed. The second image 1701 shown in FIG. 17 is the first (1 of 4) of the four second images corresponding to the to-be-processed area of the first image. The user can also edit, delete, and share the second image 1701.
上述详细阐述了本申请实施例的方法,下面为了便于更好地实施本申请实施例的上述方案,相应地,下面还提供用于配合实施上述方案的相关装置。The foregoing describes the methods of the embodiments of the present application in detail. In order to facilitate better implementation of the above solutions of the embodiments of the present application, correspondingly, related devices for cooperating with the implementation of the foregoing solutions are also provided below.
图18为本公开实施例提供的图像处理装置的结构示意图。FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of an image processing device provided by an embodiment of the disclosure.
如图18所示,该图像处理装置1800,包括:As shown in FIG. 18, the image processing device 1800 includes:
一个或多个处理器1810;以及One or more processors 1810; and
计算机可读存储介质1820,用于存储一个或多个计算机程序1821,计算机程序1821在被处理器1810执行时,实现:The computer-readable storage medium 1820 is configured to store one or more computer programs 1821. When the computer program 1821 is executed by the processor 1810, it realizes:
获得当前姿态角下与第一焦距对应的第一最大视角区域,并且获得与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域;Obtaining a first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length under the current attitude angle, and obtaining a second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length;
将第一最大视角区域和第二最大视角区域进行比较;以及Comparing the first largest viewing angle area with the second largest viewing angle area; and
根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,以便于获取待处理区域在第二焦距下的至少一个第二图像,第一图像是在第一焦距下获取的;Determine the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result, so as to obtain at least one second image of the area to be processed at the second focal length, where the first image is obtained at the first focal length;
其中,第二焦距大于第一焦距。Wherein, the second focal length is greater than the first focal length.
在一些可能的实施例中,与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域是基于姿态调整装置的最大可转动角度确定的。In some possible embodiments, the second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length is determined based on the maximum rotatable angle of the posture adjustment device.
在一些可能的实施例中,根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,包括:In some possible embodiments, determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result includes:
如果根据比较结果确定第二最大视角区域包括第一最大视角区域,则确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围为第一图像中的任意区域。If it is determined according to the comparison result that the second maximum viewing angle area includes the first maximum viewing angle area, it is determined that the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image is any area in the first image.
在一些可能的实施例中,根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的 可选范围,包括:In some possible embodiments, determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result includes:
如果根据比较结果确定第二最大视角区域包括部分第一最大视角区域,则确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围为第一最大视角区域和第二最大视角区域的重叠区域。If it is determined according to the comparison result that the second maximum viewing angle area includes part of the first maximum viewing angle area, the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image is determined to be the overlapping area of the first maximum viewing angle area and the second maximum viewing angle area.
在一些可能的实施例中,当前姿态角是当前俯仰角;In some possible embodiments, the current attitude angle is the current pitch angle;
根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,包括:The selectable range of the region to be processed in the first image is determined according to the comparison result, including:
如果根据比较结果确定第一最大视角区域的第一上限超出第二最大视角区域的第二上限,则基于第一上限、第二上限和与第一焦距对应的垂直方向视角区域,确定可选范围在第一最大视角区域的可选上限。If it is determined according to the comparison result that the first upper limit of the first maximum viewing angle area exceeds the second upper limit of the second maximum viewing angle area, the selectable range is determined based on the first upper limit, the second upper limit, and the vertical viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length Optional upper limit in the first maximum viewing angle area.
在一些可能的实施例中,当前姿态角是当前俯仰角;In some possible embodiments, the current attitude angle is the current pitch angle;
根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,包括:The selectable range of the region to be processed in the first image is determined according to the comparison result, including:
如果根据比较结果确定第二最大视角区域的第二下限超出第一最大视角区域的第一下限,则基于第二下限、第一下限、和与第一焦距对应的垂直方向视角区域,确定可选范围在第一最大视角区域的可选下限。If it is determined according to the comparison result that the second lower limit of the second maximum viewing angle area exceeds the first lower limit of the first maximum viewing angle area, then based on the second lower limit, the first lower limit, and the vertical viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length, determine the optional The range is the optional lower limit of the first maximum viewing angle area.
在一些可能的实施例中,当前姿态角是当前偏航角;In some possible embodiments, the current attitude angle is the current yaw angle;
根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,包括:The selectable range of the region to be processed in the first image is determined according to the comparison result, including:
如果根据比较结果确定第一最大视角区域的第一左限超出第二最大视角区域的第二左限,则基于第一左限、第二左限和与第一焦距对应的水平方向视角区域,确定可选范围在第一最大视角区域的可选左限。If it is determined according to the comparison result that the first left limit of the first maximum angle of view area exceeds the second left limit of the second maximum angle of view area, then based on the first left limit, the second left limit, and the horizontal angle of view area corresponding to the first focal length, The selectable range is determined to be the selectable left limit of the first maximum viewing angle area.
在一些可能的实施例中,当前姿态角是当前偏航角;In some possible embodiments, the current attitude angle is the current yaw angle;
根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,包括:The selectable range of the region to be processed in the first image is determined according to the comparison result, including:
如果根据比较结果确定第二最大视角区域的第二右限超出第一最大视角区域的第一右限,则基于第二右限、第一右限、和与第一焦距对应的水平方向视角区域,确定可选范围在第一最大视角区域的可选右限。If it is determined according to the comparison result that the second right limit of the second maximum angle of view area exceeds the first right limit of the first maximum angle of view area, based on the second right limit, the first right limit, and the horizontal direction angle of view area corresponding to the first focal length To determine the selectable range at the selectable right end of the first maximum viewing angle area.
在一些可能的实施例中,应用于拍摄端的控制端,计算机程序1821在被处理器1810执行时,还用于实现:In some possible embodiments, when applied to the control end of the shooting end, the computer program 1821, when being executed by the processor 1810, is also used to implement:
显示可选范围的多个边界中的至少一个。At least one of the multiple boundaries of the selectable range is displayed.
在一些可能的实施例中,在根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围之后,计算机程序1821在被处理器1810执行时,还用于实现:In some possible embodiments, after the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image is determined according to the comparison result, when the computer program 1821 is executed by the processor 1810, it is further used to implement:
确定待处理区域,其中,第二最大视角区域包括待处理区域;以及Determining the area to be processed, where the second largest viewing angle area includes the area to be processed; and
基于第二焦距和待处理区域确定拍照关联信息,以便基于拍照关联信息获取待处理区域在第二焦距下的至少一个第二图像。The photographing associated information is determined based on the second focal length and the area to be processed, so as to acquire at least one second image of the area to be processed at the second focal length based on the photographing associated information.
在一些可能的实施例中,在确定待处理区域之前,计算机程序1821在被处理器1810执行时,还用于实现:In some possible embodiments, before determining the area to be processed, when the computer program 1821 is executed by the processor 1810, it is also used to implement:
获取候选待处理区域;Obtain candidate areas to be processed;
确定待处理区域,包括:Determine the area to be processed, including:
如果确定候选待处理区域未超出可选范围,则确定候选待处理区域为待处理区域。If it is determined that the candidate to-be-processed area does not exceed the selectable range, the candidate to-be-processed area is determined to be the to-be-processed area.
在一些可能的实施例中,在获取候选待处理区域之后,计算机程序1821在被处理器1810执行时,还用于实现:In some possible embodiments, after obtaining the candidate to-be-processed area, when the computer program 1821 is executed by the processor 1810, it is further used to implement:
如果确定候选待处理区域超出可选范围,则输出提示信息。If it is determined that the candidate to-be-processed area exceeds the selectable range, a prompt message is output.
在一些可能的实施例中,确定待处理区域,包括:In some possible embodiments, determining the area to be processed includes:
基于图像识别算法确定待处理区域。Determine the area to be processed based on the image recognition algorithm.
在一些可能的实施例中,基于图像识别算法确定待处理区域包括:In some possible embodiments, determining the area to be processed based on the image recognition algorithm includes:
对第一图像进行图像识别,确定待处理对象;以及Perform image recognition on the first image to determine the object to be processed; and
将待处理对象所在区域作为待处理区域。Use the area where the object to be processed is located as the area to be processed.
在一些可能的实施例中,基于图像识别算法确定待处理区域包括:In some possible embodiments, determining the area to be processed based on the image recognition algorithm includes:
基于预设任务以及图像识别算法从第一图像中确定待处理区域。The area to be processed is determined from the first image based on the preset task and the image recognition algorithm.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照关联信息包括:拍摄位姿序列信息。In some possible embodiments, the photographing related information includes: photographing pose sequence information.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍摄位姿序列信息是基于拍摄组合信息确定的,拍摄组合信息是基于第二焦距和待处理区域确定的。In some possible embodiments, the shooting pose sequence information is determined based on the shooting combination information, and the shooting combination information is determined based on the second focal length and the area to be processed.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍摄组合信息包括:拍照次数,以及每次拍照 的待拍照区域;In some possible embodiments, the photographing combination information includes: the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph;
基于第二焦距和待处理区域确定拍照关联信息包括:Determining photographing related information based on the second focal length and the area to be processed includes:
基于第二焦距和待处理区域,确定拍照次数以及每次拍照的待拍照区域;以及Based on the second focal length and the area to be processed, determine the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph; and
基于待拍照区域确定拍摄位姿序列信息;Determine the shooting pose sequence information based on the area to be photographed;
其中,拍摄位姿序列信息中的每个拍摄位姿对应一个待拍照区域,以便在拍摄位姿序列信息的各个拍摄位姿下,以第二焦距拍摄与待拍照区域对应的第二图像。Wherein, each shooting pose in the shooting pose sequence information corresponds to a to-be-photographed area, so that under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information, a second image corresponding to the to-be-photographed area is captured at the second focal length.
在一些可能的实施例中,基于第二焦距和待处理区域,确定拍照次数以及每次拍照的待拍照区域,包括:In some possible embodiments, based on the second focal length and the area to be processed, determining the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph includes:
基于图像传感器尺寸和第二焦距确定与第二焦距对应的视角区域;Determining a viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length based on the size of the image sensor and the second focal length;
基于待处理区域和与第二焦距对应的视角区域确定拍照次数,以及每次拍照的待拍照区域;Determine the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph based on the area to be processed and the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length;
其中,多个待拍照区域构成的区域包括待处理区域。Wherein, the area formed by a plurality of areas to be photographed includes the area to be processed.
在一些可能的实施例中,基于待处理区域和与第二焦距对应的视角区域确定拍照次数,以及每次拍照的待拍照区域,包括:In some possible embodiments, the determination of the number of photographs based on the area to be processed and the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length, and the area to be photographed for each photograph include:
基于待处理区域、与第二焦距对应的视角区域和待拍照区域之间的图像重叠比例确定拍照次数,以及每次拍照的待拍照区域。The number of photographing times and the area to be photographed for each photograph are determined based on the image overlap ratio between the area to be processed, the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length, and the area to be photographed.
在一些可能的实施例中,基于待拍照区域确定拍摄位姿序列信息,包括:In some possible embodiments, determining the shooting pose sequence information based on the area to be photographed includes:
基于第一焦距下的相机当前位姿和第二焦距角度位置偏差确定与每次拍照的待拍照区域对应的拍摄位姿,并将确定的所有拍摄位姿的集合作为拍摄位姿序列信息。The shooting pose corresponding to the area to be photographed each time is determined based on the current pose of the camera at the first focal length and the angular position deviation of the second focal length, and the set of all the determined shooting poses is used as the shooting pose sequence information.
在一些可能的实施例中,第二焦距角度位置偏差通过以下方式确定:In some possible embodiments, the angular position deviation of the second focal length is determined in the following manner:
确定与第二焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置和与第一焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置之间的第一偏差;Determining the first deviation between the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length;
确定待处理区域的指定位置和与第一焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置之 间的第二偏差;Determining the second deviation between the designated position of the area to be processed and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length;
确定待拍照区域的指定位置与待处理区域的指定位置之间的第三偏差;以及Determine the third deviation between the designated position of the area to be photographed and the designated position of the area to be processed; and
基于第一偏差、第二偏差和第三偏差确定待拍照区域与第一焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置之间的第二焦距角度位置偏差。Based on the first deviation, the second deviation, and the third deviation, the second focal length angular position deviation between the to-be-photographed area and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length is determined.
在一些可能的实施例中,在基于待拍照区域确定拍摄位姿序列之后,计算机程序1821在被处理器1810执行时,还用于实现:In some possible embodiments, after the photographing pose sequence is determined based on the area to be photographed, the computer program 1821, when being executed by the processor 1810, is also used to implement:
控制拍摄端在拍摄位姿序列信息的各个拍摄位姿下,以第二焦距拍摄与待拍照区域对应的第二图像。The shooting end is controlled to shoot the second image corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍摄端包括拍摄装置,控制拍摄端在拍摄位姿序列信息的各个拍摄位姿下,以第二焦距拍摄与待拍照区域对应的第二图像,包括:In some possible embodiments, the shooting end includes a shooting device, and controlling the shooting end to shoot the second image corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information includes:
通过姿态调整装置控制拍摄装置依次处于拍摄位姿序列信息中的各个拍摄位姿,并控制拍摄装置在各个拍摄位姿下,以第二焦距拍摄与待拍照区域分别对应的第二图像。The posture adjustment device controls the shooting device to sequentially be in each shooting pose in the shooting pose sequence information, and controls the shooting device to shoot the second images corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length under each shooting pose.
在一些可能的实施例中,姿态调整装置设置在可移动平台上。In some possible embodiments, the posture adjustment device is provided on a movable platform.
在一些可能的实施例中,在控制拍摄端在拍摄位姿序列信息的各拍摄位姿下,以第二焦距拍摄与待拍照区域对应的第二图像之后,计算机程序1821在被处理器1810执行时,还用于实现:In some possible embodiments, the computer program 1821 is executed by the processor 1810 after controlling the shooting end to shoot the second image corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information. When, it is also used to achieve:
关联地存储第一图像和第二图像。The first image and the second image are stored in association.
在一些可能的实施例中,关联地存储第一图像和第二图像包括:In some possible embodiments, storing the first image and the second image in association includes:
确定第二图像与待处理区域之间的第一映射关系,并且确定待处理区域与第一图像之间的第二映射关系;以及Determine the first mapping relationship between the second image and the area to be processed, and determine the second mapping relationship between the area to be processed and the first image; and
存储第一图像、待处理区域、第二图像、第一映射关系和第二映射关系。Store the first image, the area to be processed, the second image, the first mapping relationship, and the second mapping relationship.
在一些可能的实施例中,应用于拍摄端,第二图像为未经处理的拍摄图像。In some possible embodiments, when applied to the shooting end, the second image is an unprocessed shooting image.
在一些可能的实施例中,应用于拍摄端的控制端,第二图像为经处理后的拍摄图像,第二图像的分辨率小于未经处理的拍摄图像的分辨率。In some possible embodiments, applied to the control terminal of the shooting terminal, the second image is a processed captured image, and the resolution of the second image is smaller than the resolution of the unprocessed captured image.
在一些可能的实施例中,计算机程序1821在被处理器1810执行时,还用于实现:In some possible embodiments, when the computer program 1821 is executed by the processor 1810, it is also used to implement:
如果接收到用于查看第二图像的操作指令,则从拍摄端获取第二图像对应的未经处理的拍摄图像;If an operation instruction for viewing the second image is received, obtaining an unprocessed photographed image corresponding to the second image from the photographing terminal;
显示第二图像对应的未经处理的拍摄图像。Display the unprocessed captured image corresponding to the second image.
在一些可能的实施例中,在控制拍摄端在拍摄位姿序列的各拍摄位姿下,以第二焦距拍摄与待拍照区域对应的第二图像之后,计算机程序1821在被处理器1810执行时,还用于实现:In some possible embodiments, after controlling the shooting end to shoot the second image corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length in each shooting position of the shooting position sequence, the computer program 1821 is executed by the processor 1810. , Also used to achieve:
获取第三图像,第三图像是基于第二图像合成的;以及Acquire a third image, the third image is synthesized based on the second image; and
关联地存储第一图像和第三图像。The first image and the third image are stored in association.
在一些可能的实施例中,第一图像和第二图像是变焦拍摄装置分别在第一焦距和第二焦距下拍摄的。In some possible embodiments, the first image and the second image are captured by the zoom camera at the first focal length and the second focal length, respectively.
在一些可能的实施例中,第一图像是第一拍摄装置拍摄的,第二图像是第二拍摄装置拍摄的;其中,第一拍摄装置的焦距至少部分与第二拍摄装置的焦距不同。In some possible embodiments, the first image is taken by a first photographing device, and the second image is taken by a second photographing device; wherein the focal length of the first photographing device is at least partially different from the focal length of the second photographing device.
在一些可能的实施例中,第一拍摄装置和第二拍摄装置中至少一个的焦距可调。In some possible embodiments, the focal length of at least one of the first camera and the second camera is adjustable.
在一些可能的实施例中,第一拍摄装置是广角相机,第二拍摄装置是长焦相机。In some possible embodiments, the first camera is a wide-angle camera, and the second camera is a telephoto camera.
在一些可能的实施例中,第二焦距包括以下任意一种:固定焦距、预设焦距、基于焦距算法确定的焦距、基于传感器确定的焦距和用户选定的焦距。In some possible embodiments, the second focal length includes any one of the following: a fixed focal length, a preset focal length, a focal length determined based on a focal length algorithm, a focal length determined based on a sensor, and a focal length selected by the user.
在一些可能的实施例中,基于传感器确定的焦距包括:基于距离信息确定的焦距,距离信息是通过激光测距仪确定的。In some possible embodiments, the focal length determined based on the sensor includes a focal length determined based on distance information, and the distance information is determined by a laser rangefinder.
图19为本公开实施例提供的图像处理系统的结构示意图。FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of an image processing system provided by an embodiment of the disclosure.
如图19所示,该图像处理系统1900可以包括:As shown in FIG. 19, the image processing system 1900 may include:
拍照装置1910以及与所述拍照装置1910通信连接的控制终端1920;A photographing device 1910 and a control terminal 1920 communicatively connected with the photographing device 1910;
拍照装置1910用于获得拍照装置1910在当前姿态角下与第一焦距对应的第一最大视角区域,并且获得与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域;将第一最大视角区域和第二最大视角区域进行比较;以及根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,以便控制拍照装置1910获取待处理区域在第二焦距下的至少一个第二图像,第一图像是在第一焦距下获取的;其中,第二焦距大于第一焦距。The photographing device 1910 is used to obtain the first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length under the current attitude angle of the photographing device 1910, and to obtain the second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length; The viewing angle area is compared; and the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image is determined according to the comparison result, so as to control the photographing device 1910 to obtain at least one second image of the area to be processed at the second focal length, and the first image is in the first image. Obtained at a focal length; where the second focal length is greater than the first focal length.
在一些可能的实施例中,与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域是基于姿态调整装置的最大可转动角度确定的。In some possible embodiments, the second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length is determined based on the maximum rotatable angle of the posture adjustment device.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910具体用于如果根据比较结果确定第二最大视角区域包括第一最大视角区域,则确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围为第一图像中的任意区域。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to determine that the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image is in the first image if it is determined according to the comparison result that the second maximum angle of view area includes the first maximum angle of view area. Any area of.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910具体用于如果根据比较结果确定第二最大视角区域包括部分第一最大视角区域,则确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围为第一最大视角区域和第二最大视角区域的重叠区域。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to determine that the second maximum viewing angle area includes part of the first maximum viewing angle area according to the comparison result, and then determining that the selectable range of the to-be-processed area in the first image is the first maximum viewing angle area. The area of overlap between the viewing angle area and the second largest viewing angle area.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910具体用于当前姿态角是当前俯仰角时,如果根据比较结果确定第一最大视角区域的第一上限超出第二最大视角区域的第二上限,则基于第一上限、第二上限和与第一焦距对应的垂直方向视角区域,确定可选范围在第一最大视角区域的可选上限。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 is specifically used when the current attitude angle is the current pitch angle. If it is determined according to the comparison result that the first upper limit of the first maximum viewing angle area exceeds the second upper limit of the second maximum viewing angle area, it is based on The first upper limit, the second upper limit, and the vertical viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length determine the optional upper limit of the selectable range in the first maximum viewing angle area.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910具体用于当前姿态角是当前俯仰角时,如果根据比较结果确定第二最大视角区域的第二下限超出第一最大视角区域的第一下限,则基于第二下限、第一下限、和与第一焦距对应的垂直方向视角区域,确定可选范围在第一最大视角区域的可选下限。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 is specifically used when the current attitude angle is the current pitch angle. If it is determined according to the comparison result that the second lower limit of the second maximum viewing angle area exceeds the first lower limit of the first maximum viewing angle area, it is based on The second lower limit, the first lower limit, and the vertical viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length determine the optional lower limit of the selectable range in the first maximum viewing angle area.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910具体用于当前姿态角是当前偏航角时,如果根据比较结果确定第一最大视角区域的第一左限超出第二最大视 角区域的第二左限,则基于第一左限、第二左限和与第一焦距对应的水平方向视角区域,确定可选范围在第一最大视角区域的可选左限。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 is specifically used when the current attitude angle is the current yaw angle, if it is determined according to the comparison result that the first left limit of the first maximum angle of view area exceeds the second left limit of the second maximum angle of view area , Based on the first left limit, the second left limit, and the horizontal viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length, the selectable range is determined to be the selectable left limit of the first maximum viewing angle area.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910具体用于当前姿态角是当前偏航角时,如果根据比较结果确定第二最大视角区域的第二右限超出第一最大视角区域的第一右限,则基于第二右限、第一右限、和与第一焦距对应的水平方向视角区域,确定可选范围在第一最大视角区域的可选右限。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 is specifically used when the current attitude angle is the current yaw angle, if it is determined according to the comparison result that the second right limit of the second maximum viewing angle area exceeds the first right limit of the first maximum viewing angle area , Based on the second right limit, the first right limit, and the horizontal viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length, the selectable range is determined to be the selectable right limit of the first maximum viewing angle area.
在一些可能的实施例中,控制终端1920包括显示界面,控制终端1920还用于通过显示界面显示可选范围的多个边界中的至少一个。In some possible embodiments, the control terminal 1920 includes a display interface, and the control terminal 1920 is further configured to display at least one of multiple boundaries of the selectable range through the display interface.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910还用于在根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围之后,确定待处理区域,其中,第二最大视角区域包括待处理区域;以及基于第二焦距和待处理区域确定拍照关联信息,以便控制拍照装置1910基于拍照关联信息获取待处理区域在第二焦距下的至少一个第二图像。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 is further configured to determine the area to be processed after determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result, where the second largest viewing angle area includes the area to be processed; And determining photographing related information based on the second focal length and the area to be processed, so as to control the photographing device 1910 to acquire at least one second image of the area to be processed at the second focal length based on the photographing associated information.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910还用于在确定待处理区域之前,获取候选待处理区域;In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 is further configured to obtain candidate regions to be processed before determining the regions to be processed;
并具体用于如果确定候选待处理区域未超出可选范围,则确定候选待处理区域为待处理区域。And it is specifically used to determine that the candidate to-be-processed area is the to-be-processed area if it is determined that the candidate to-be-processed area does not exceed the selectable range.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910还用于在获取候选待处理区域之后,如果确定候选待处理区域超出可选范围,则输出提示信息。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 is further configured to output prompt information if it is determined that the candidate to-be-processed area is beyond the selectable range after acquiring the candidate to-be-processed area.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910具体用于基于图像识别算法确定待处理区域。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to determine the area to be processed based on an image recognition algorithm.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910具体用于对第一图像进行图像识别,确定待处理对象;以及将待处理对象所在区域作为待处理区域。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to perform image recognition on the first image, determine the object to be processed, and use the area where the object to be processed is located as the area to be processed.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910具体用于基于预设任务以及图像识别算法从第一图像中确定待处理区域。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to determine the area to be processed from the first image based on a preset task and an image recognition algorithm.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照关联信息包括:拍摄位姿序列信息。In some possible embodiments, the photographing related information includes: photographing pose sequence information.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍摄位姿序列信息是基于拍摄组合信息确定的,拍摄组合信息是基于第二焦距和待处理区域确定的。In some possible embodiments, the shooting pose sequence information is determined based on the shooting combination information, and the shooting combination information is determined based on the second focal length and the area to be processed.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍摄组合信息包括拍照次数,以及每次拍照的待拍照区域;In some possible embodiments, the photographing combination information includes the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph;
拍照装置1910具体用于基于第二焦距和待处理区域,确定拍照次数以及每次拍照的待拍照区域;以及基于待拍照区域确定拍摄位姿序列信息;其中,拍摄位姿序列信息中的每个拍摄位姿对应一个待拍照区域,以便拍照装置1910在拍摄位姿序列信息的各个拍摄位姿下,以第二焦距拍摄与待拍照区域对应的第二图像。The photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to determine the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph based on the second focal length and the area to be processed; and to determine the photographing pose sequence information based on the area to be photographed; wherein, each of the photographing pose sequence information The shooting pose corresponds to a region to be photographed, so that the photographing device 1910 shoots the second image corresponding to the region to be photographed at the second focal length under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910具体用于基于图像传感器尺寸和第二焦距确定与第二焦距对应的视角区域;以及基于待处理区域和与第二焦距对应的视角区域确定拍照次数,以及每次拍照的待拍照区域;其中,多个待拍照区域构成的区域包括待处理区域。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to determine the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length based on the size of the image sensor and the second focal length; and to determine the number of photographs based on the area to be processed and the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length, And the area to be photographed each time the photograph is taken; wherein the area formed by multiple areas to be photographed includes the area to be processed.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910具体用于基于待处理区域、与第二焦距对应的视角区域和待拍照区域之间的图像重叠比例确定拍照次数,以及每次拍照的待拍照区域。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to determine the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph based on the area to be processed, the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length, and the image overlap ratio between the area to be photographed.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910具体用于基于第一焦距下的相机当前位姿和第二焦距角度位置偏差确定与每次拍照的待拍照区域对应的拍摄位姿,并将确定的所有拍摄位姿的集合作为拍摄位姿序列信息。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to determine the photographing pose corresponding to the area to be photographed for each photograph based on the current pose of the camera at the first focal length and the angular position deviation of the second focal length, and determine The collection of all shooting poses is used as the shooting pose sequence information.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910具体用于确定与第二焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置和与第一焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置之间的第一偏差;以及确定待处理区域的指定位置和与第一焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置之间的第二偏差;以及确定待拍照区域的指定位置与待处理区域的指定位置之间的第三偏差;以及基于第一偏差、第二偏差和第三偏差确定待拍照区域与第一焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置之间的第二焦距角度位置偏差。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to determine the first deviation between the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length; and determining the area to be processed The second deviation between the designated position of the area and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length; and the third deviation between the designated position of the area to be photographed and the designated position of the area to be processed; and based on the first deviation, The second deviation and the third deviation determine the second focal length angular position deviation between the area to be photographed and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910具体用于在拍摄位姿序列信息的 各个拍摄位姿下,以第二焦距拍摄与待拍照区域对应的第二图像。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to photograph the second image corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length under each photographing pose of the photographing pose sequence information.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910包括姿态调整装置和拍摄装置,拍照装置1910具体用于通过姿态调整装置控制拍摄装置依次处于拍摄位姿序列信息中的各个拍摄位姿,并控制拍摄装置在各个拍摄位姿下,以第二焦距拍摄与待拍照区域分别对应的第二图像。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 includes a posture adjusting device and a photographing device. The photographing device 1910 is specifically used to control the photographing device to be in each photographing pose in the photographing pose sequence information sequentially through the pose adjusting device, and to control the photographing device In each shooting posture, a second image corresponding to the area to be photographed is shot at the second focal length.
在一些可能的实施例中,姿态调整装置设置在可移动平台上。In some possible embodiments, the posture adjustment device is provided on a movable platform.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910还用于在拍摄位姿序列信息的各拍摄位姿下,以第二焦距拍摄与待拍照区域对应的第二图像之后,关联地存储第一图像和第二图像。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 is further configured to store the first image and the second image corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length under each photographing pose of the photographing pose sequence information. The second image.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910具体用于确定第二图像与待处理区域之间的第一映射关系,并且确定待处理区域与第一图像之间的第二映射关系;以及存储第一图像、待处理区域、第二图像、第一映射关系和第二映射关系。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 is specifically configured to determine the first mapping relationship between the second image and the area to be processed, and determine the second mapping relationship between the area to be processed and the first image; and store the first mapping relationship between the area to be processed and the first image. An image, an area to be processed, a second image, a first mapping relationship, and a second mapping relationship.
在一些可能的实施例中,第二图像为未经处理的拍摄图像并存储于拍照装置。In some possible embodiments, the second image is an unprocessed captured image and stored in the photographing device.
在一些可能的实施例中,第二图像为经处理后的拍摄图像并存储于控制终端,第二图像的分辨率小于未经处理的拍摄图像的分辨率。In some possible embodiments, the second image is a processed captured image and stored in the control terminal, and the resolution of the second image is smaller than the resolution of the unprocessed captured image.
在一些可能的实施例中,控制终端还包括显示界面,控制终端1920还用于如果接收到用于查看第二图像的操作指令,则从拍照装置1910获取与第二图像对应的未经处理的拍摄图像;以及通过显示界面显示第二图像对应的未经处理的拍摄图像。In some possible embodiments, the control terminal further includes a display interface, and the control terminal 1920 is further configured to obtain an unprocessed image corresponding to the second image from the photographing device 1910 if an operation instruction for viewing the second image is received. Capturing an image; and displaying the unprocessed captured image corresponding to the second image through the display interface.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910还用于在控制拍摄端在拍摄位姿序列的各拍摄位姿下,以第二焦距拍摄与待拍照区域对应的第二图像之后,获取第三图像,第三图像是基于第二图像合成的;以及关联地存储第一图像和第三图像。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 is also used to control the photographing end to photograph the second image corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length under each photographing position of the photographing position sequence, and then acquire the third image. , The third image is synthesized based on the second image; and the first image and the third image are stored in association.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910包括变焦拍摄装置,变焦拍摄装 置用于分别在第一焦距和第二焦距下拍摄第一图像和第二图像。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 includes a zoom photographing device, which is used to photograph the first image and the second image at the first focal length and the second focal length, respectively.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910包括第一拍摄装置和第二拍摄装置;In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 includes a first photographing device and a second photographing device;
第一拍摄装置用于拍摄第一图像;The first photographing device is used to photograph a first image;
第二拍摄装置用于拍摄第二图像;The second photographing device is used to photograph a second image;
其中,第一拍摄装置的焦距至少部分与第二拍摄装置的焦距不同。Wherein, the focal length of the first photographing device is at least partially different from the focal length of the second photographing device.
在一些可能的实施例中,第一拍摄装置和第二拍摄装置中至少一个的焦距可调。In some possible embodiments, the focal length of at least one of the first camera and the second camera is adjustable.
在一些可能的实施例中,第一拍摄装置是广角相机,第二拍摄装置是长焦相机。In some possible embodiments, the first camera is a wide-angle camera, and the second camera is a telephoto camera.
在一些可能的实施例中,第二焦距包括以下任意一种:固定焦距、预设焦距、基于焦距算法确定的焦距、基于传感器确定的焦距和用户选定的焦距。In some possible embodiments, the second focal length includes any one of the following: a fixed focal length, a preset focal length, a focal length determined based on a focal length algorithm, a focal length determined based on a sensor, and a focal length selected by the user.
在一些可能的实施例中,拍照装置1910包括激光测距仪,激光测距仪用于测量距离信息,以基于距离信息确定第二焦距。In some possible embodiments, the photographing device 1910 includes a laser rangefinder, and the laser rangefinder is used to measure distance information to determine the second focal length based on the distance information.
需要说明的是,以上所示的图像处理系统仅为示例性的,不能解释为对本公开的限定。其中,上述图像处理系统中由拍照装置1910实现的操作,至少部分地可以由控制终端1920执行。此外,上述图像处理系统中由拍照装置1910实现的操作,至少部分地可以由无人飞行器执行。It should be noted that the image processing system shown above is only exemplary and cannot be construed as a limitation of the present disclosure. Among them, the operations implemented by the photographing device 1910 in the above-mentioned image processing system may be at least partially executed by the control terminal 1920. In addition, the operations implemented by the photographing device 1910 in the above-mentioned image processing system can be at least partially performed by an unmanned aerial vehicle.
例如,可以由控制终端1920获得拍照装置1910在当前姿态角下与第一焦距对应的第一最大视角区域,并且获得与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域;将第一最大视角区域和第二最大视角区域进行比较;以及根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,以便控制拍照装置1910获取待处理区域在第二焦距下的至少一个第二图像,第一图像是在第一焦距下获取的;其中,所述第二焦距大于所述第一焦距。For example, the control terminal 1920 may obtain the first maximum angle of view area corresponding to the first focal length of the photographing device 1910 at the current attitude angle, and obtain the second maximum angle of view area corresponding to the second focal length; combine the first maximum angle of view area with the first Compare the two regions with the largest viewing angle; and determine the selectable range of the region to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result, so as to control the photographing device 1910 to obtain at least one second image of the region to be processed at the second focal length, where the first image is Obtained at a first focal length; wherein the second focal length is greater than the first focal length.
又例如,控制终端1920可以用于如果根据比较结果确定第二最大视角区域包括第一最大视角区域,则确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围为第 一图像中的任意区域。For another example, the control terminal 1920 may be configured to determine that the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image is any area in the first image if it is determined according to the comparison result that the second maximum angle of view area includes the first maximum angle of view area.
需要说明的是,上述说明的拍照装置1910可以为任意具有拍摄功能的设备,可以指相机、云台相机、包括相机的可移动平台等。It should be noted that the photographing device 1910 described above may be any device with a photographing function, and may refer to a camera, a pan-tilt camera, a movable platform including a camera, and the like.
附图中的流程图和框图,图示了按照本公开各种实施例的系统、方法和计算机程序产品的可能实现的体系架构、功能和操作。在这点上,流程图或框图中的每个方框可以代表一个模块、程序段、或代码的一部分,上述模块、程序段、或代码的一部分包含一个或多个用于实现规定的逻辑功能的可执行指令。也应当注意,在有些作为替换的实现中,方框中所标注的功能也可以以不同于附图中所标注的顺序发生。例如,两个接连地表示的方框实际上可以基本并行地执行,它们有时也可以按相反的顺序执行,这依所涉及的功能而定。也要注意的是,框图或流程图中的每个方框、以及框图或流程图中的方框的组合,可以用执行规定的功能或操作的专用的基于硬件的系统来实现,或者可以用专用硬件与计算机指令的组合来实现。The flowcharts and block diagrams in the accompanying drawings illustrate the possible implementation architecture, functions, and operations of the system, method, and computer program product according to various embodiments of the present disclosure. In this regard, each block in the flowchart or block diagram may represent a module, program segment, or part of the code, and the above-mentioned module, program segment, or part of the code contains one or more for realizing the specified logic function. Executable instructions. It should also be noted that, in some alternative implementations, the functions marked in the block may also occur in a different order from the order marked in the drawings. For example, two blocks shown in succession can actually be executed substantially in parallel, and they can sometimes be executed in the reverse order, depending on the functions involved. It should also be noted that each block in the block diagram or flowchart, and the combination of blocks in the block diagram or flowchart, can be implemented by a dedicated hardware-based system that performs the specified function or operation, or can be implemented by It is realized by a combination of dedicated hardware and computer instructions.
图20为本公开实施例提供的控制终端的结构示意图。如图20所示,控制终端70可以包括:至少一个处理器701,例如CPU,至少一个网络接口704,用户接口703,存储器705,至少一个通信总线702,显示屏706。其中,通信总线702用于实现这些组件之间的连接通信。其中,用户接口703可以包括触摸屏、键盘、鼠标、摇杆等等。网络接口704可选的可以包括标准的有线接口、无线接口(如WI-FI接口),通过网络接口704可以与服务器及拍摄装置20建立通信连接。存储器705可以是高速RAM存储器,也可以是非不稳定的存储器(non-volatile memory),例如至少一个磁盘存储器,存储器705包括本发明实施例中的flash。存储器705可选的还可以是至少一个位于远离前述处理器701的存储系统。如图20所示,作为一种计算机存储介质的存储器705中可以包括操作系统、网络通信模块、用户接口模块以及程序指令。FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a control terminal provided by an embodiment of the disclosure. As shown in FIG. 20, the control terminal 70 may include: at least one processor 701, such as a CPU, at least one network interface 704, a user interface 703, a memory 705, at least one communication bus 702, and a display screen 706. Among them, the communication bus 702 is used to implement connection and communication between these components. Among them, the user interface 703 may include a touch screen, a keyboard, a mouse, a joystick, and so on. The network interface 704 may optionally include a standard wired interface and a wireless interface (such as a WI-FI interface), and a communication connection with the server and the camera 20 can be established through the network interface 704. The memory 705 may be a high-speed RAM memory or a non-volatile memory (non-volatile memory), such as at least one disk memory. The memory 705 includes the flash in the embodiment of the present invention. Optionally, the memory 705 may also be at least one storage system located far away from the foregoing processor 701. As shown in FIG. 20, the memory 705 as a computer storage medium may include an operating system, a network communication module, a user interface module, and program instructions.
需要说明的是,网络接口704可以连接获取器、发射器或其他通信模块, 其他通信模块可以包括但不限于WiFi模块、蓝牙模块等,可以理解,本申请实施例中控制终端70也可以包括获取器、发射器和其他通信模块等。It should be noted that the network interface 704 can be connected to an acquirer, a transmitter, or other communication modules. Other communication modules can include but are not limited to a WiFi module, a Bluetooth module, etc. It should be understood that the control terminal 70 in the embodiment of the present application may also include acquiring Receivers, transmitters and other communication modules.
处理器701可以用于调用存储器705中存储的程序指令,并执行以下操作:The processor 701 may be used to call program instructions stored in the memory 705 and perform the following operations:
获得当前姿态角下与第一焦距对应的第一最大视角区域,并且获得与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域;Obtaining a first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length under the current attitude angle, and obtaining a second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length;
将第一最大视角区域和第二最大视角区域进行比较;以及Comparing the first largest viewing angle area with the second largest viewing angle area; and
根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,以便于获取待处理区域在第二焦距下的至少一个第二图像,第一图像是在第一焦距下获取的;Determine the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result, so as to obtain at least one second image of the area to be processed at the second focal length, where the first image is obtained at the first focal length;
其中,第二焦距大于第一焦距。Wherein, the second focal length is greater than the first focal length.
可理解的是,本实施例的控制终端70的功能可根据上述方法实施例中的方法具体实现,此处不再赘述。It is understandable that the function of the control terminal 70 in this embodiment can be specifically implemented according to the method in the above method embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
图21为本公开实施例提供的拍照装置的构示意图。如图21所示,拍照装置80可以包括:至少一个处理器801,例如CPU,至少一个网络接口804,变焦镜头803,存储器805,广角镜头806及至少一个通信总线802。其中,通信总线802用于实现这些组件之间的连接通信。其中,网络接20口804可选的可以包括标准的有线接口、无线接口(如WI-FI接口),通过网络接口804可以与控制终端70建立通信连接。存储器805可以是高速RAM存储器,也可以是非不稳定的存储器(non-volatile memory),例如至少一个磁盘存储器,存储器805包括本发明实施例中的flash。存储器805可选的还可以是至少一个位于远离前述处理器801的存储系统。如图21所示,作为一种计算机存储介质的存储器805中可以包括操作系统、网络通信模块、以及程序指令。FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a photographing device provided by an embodiment of the disclosure. As shown in FIG. 21, the photographing device 80 may include: at least one processor 801, such as a CPU, at least one network interface 804, a zoom lens 803, a memory 805, a wide-angle lens 806, and at least one communication bus 802. Among them, the communication bus 802 is used to implement connection and communication between these components. Among them, the network interface 20 port 804 may optionally include a standard wired interface and a wireless interface (such as a WI-FI interface), and a communication connection with the control terminal 70 can be established through the network interface 804. The memory 805 may be a high-speed RAM memory or a non-volatile memory (non-volatile memory), such as at least one disk memory. The memory 805 includes the flash in the embodiment of the present invention. Optionally, the memory 805 may also be at least one storage system located far away from the aforementioned processor 801. As shown in FIG. 21, the memory 805 as a computer storage medium may include an operating system, a network communication module, and program instructions.
需要说明的是,网络接口804可以连接获取器、发射器或其他通信模块,其他通信模块可以包括但不限于WiFi模块、蓝牙模块等,可以理解,本发 明实施例中飞行轨迹录制设备也可以包括获取器、发射器和其他通信模块等。It should be noted that the network interface 804 can be connected to an acquirer, a transmitter, or other communication modules. Other communication modules can include but are not limited to a WiFi module, a Bluetooth module, etc. It should be understood that the flight trajectory recording device in the embodiment of the present invention can also include Obtainers, transmitters and other communication modules, etc.
处理器801可以用于调用存储器805中存储的程序指令,并执行以下操作:The processor 801 may be used to call the program instructions stored in the memory 805 and perform the following operations:
获得当前姿态角下与第一焦距对应的第一最大视角区域,并且获得与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域;Obtaining a first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length under the current attitude angle, and obtaining a second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length;
将第一最大视角区域和第二最大视角区域进行比较;以及Comparing the first largest viewing angle area with the second largest viewing angle area; and
根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,以便于获取待处理区域在第二焦距下的至少一个第二图像,第一图像是在第一焦距下获取的;Determine the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result, so as to obtain at least one second image of the area to be processed at the second focal length, where the first image is obtained at the first focal length;
其中,第二焦距大于第一焦距。Wherein, the second focal length is greater than the first focal length.
可理解的是,本实施例的拍照装置80的功能可根据上述方法实施例中的方法具体实现,此处不再赘述。It is understandable that the functions of the photographing device 80 in this embodiment can be specifically implemented according to the methods in the foregoing method embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令,当其在计算机或处理器上运行时,使得计算机或处理器执行上述任一个方法中的一个或多个步骤。上述信号处理装置的各组成模块如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在计算机可读取存储介质中。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores instructions in the computer-readable storage medium, and when it runs on a computer or a processor, the computer or the processor executes any one of the above methods. Or multiple steps. If each component module of the above-mentioned signal processing device is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者通过所述计算机可读存储介质进行传输。所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务 器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如,固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted through the computer-readable storage medium. The computer instructions can be sent from a website site, computer, server, or data center to another website site via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) , Computer, server or data center for transmission. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (SSD)).
本领域普通技术人员可以理解实现上述实施例方法中的全部或部分流程,是可以通过计算机程序来指令相关的硬件来完成,上述的程序可存储于一计算机可读取存储介质中,该程序在执行时,可包括如上述各方法的实施例的流程。A person of ordinary skill in the art can understand that all or part of the processes in the above-mentioned embodiment methods can be implemented by instructing relevant hardware through a computer program. The above-mentioned program can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. When executed, it may include the procedures of the above-mentioned method embodiments.
其中,上述的存储介质可为磁碟、光盘、只读存储记忆体(Read-Only Memory,ROM)或随机存储记忆体RAM等。在不冲突的情况下,本实施例和实施方案中的技术特征可以任意组合。Among them, the aforementioned storage medium may be a magnetic disk, an optical disc, a read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), or a random storage memory RAM, etc. In the case of no conflict, the technical features in this embodiment and the implementation can be combined arbitrarily.
最后应说明的是:以上实施方式仅用以说明本公开的技术方案,而非对其进行限制;尽管参照前述实施方式对本公开已经进行了详细的说明,但本领域的普通技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述实施方式所记载的技术方案进行修改,或者对其中部分或者全部技术特征进行等同替换;而这些修改或者替换,并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本公开实施方式技术方案的范围。Finally, it should be noted that the above embodiments are only used to illustrate the technical solutions of the present disclosure, but not to limit them; although the present disclosure has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those of ordinary skill in the art should understand: It is still possible to modify the technical solutions described in the foregoing embodiments, or equivalently replace some or all of the technical features; and these modifications or replacements do not make the essence of the corresponding technical solutions deviate from the scope of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present disclosure .

Claims (112)

  1. 一种图像处理方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:An image processing method, characterized in that the method includes:
    获得当前姿态角下与第一焦距对应的第一最大视角区域,并且获得与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域;Obtaining a first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length under the current attitude angle, and obtaining a second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length;
    将所述第一最大视角区域和所述第二最大视角区域进行比较;以及Comparing the first maximum viewing angle area and the second maximum viewing angle area; and
    根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,以便于获取所述待处理区域在所述第二焦距下的至少一个第二图像,所述第一图像是在所述第一焦距下获取的;Determine the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result, so as to obtain at least one second image of the area to be processed at the second focal length, where the first image is in the first image. Obtained at focal length;
    其中,所述第二焦距大于所述第一焦距。Wherein, the second focal length is greater than the first focal length.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域是基于姿态调整装置的最大可转动角度确定的。The method according to claim 1, wherein the second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length is determined based on the maximum rotatable angle of the posture adjustment device.
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result comprises:
    如果根据比较结果确定所述第二最大视角区域包括所述第一最大视角区域,则确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围为所述第一图像中的任意区域。If it is determined according to the comparison result that the second maximum viewing angle area includes the first maximum viewing angle area, it is determined that the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image is any area in the first image.
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result comprises:
    如果根据比较结果确定所述第二最大视角区域包括部分所述第一最大视角区域,则确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围为所述第一最大视角区域和所述第二最大视角区域的重叠区域。If it is determined according to the comparison result that the second maximum viewing angle area includes part of the first maximum viewing angle area, it is determined that the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image is the first maximum viewing angle area and the second maximum viewing angle area. The overlapping area of the viewing angle area.
  5. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述当前姿态角是当前俯仰角;The method according to claim 1, wherein the current attitude angle is a current pitch angle;
    所述根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,包括:The determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result includes:
    如果根据比较结果确定所述第一最大视角区域的第一上限超出所述第二最大视角区域的第二上限,则基于所述第一上限、所述第二上限和与所述第一焦距对应的垂直方向视角区域,确定所述可选范围在所述第一最大视角区域的可选上限。If it is determined according to the comparison result that the first upper limit of the first maximum angle of view area exceeds the second upper limit of the second maximum angle of view area, then based on the first upper limit, the second upper limit, and corresponding to the first focal length The vertical viewing angle area is determined to determine the selectable upper limit of the selectable range in the first maximum viewing angle area.
  6. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述当前姿态角是当前俯仰角;The method according to claim 1, wherein the current attitude angle is a current pitch angle;
    所述根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,包括:The determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result includes:
    如果根据比较结果确定所述第二最大视角区域的第二下限超出所述第一最大视角区域的第一下限,则基于所述第二下限、所述第一下限、和与所述第一焦距对应的垂直方向视角区域,确定所述可选范围在所述第一最大视角区域的可选下限。If it is determined according to the comparison result that the second lower limit of the second maximum viewing angle area exceeds the first lower limit of the first maximum viewing angle area, then based on the second lower limit, the first lower limit, and the first focal length Corresponding to the vertical viewing angle area, it is determined that the selectable range is within the selectable lower limit of the first maximum viewing angle area.
  7. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述当前姿态角是当前偏航角;The method according to claim 1, wherein the current attitude angle is a current yaw angle;
    所述根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,包括:The determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result includes:
    如果根据比较结果确定所述第一最大视角区域的第一左限超出所述第二最大视角区域的第二左限,则基于所述第一左限、所述第二左限和与所述第一焦距对应的水平方向视角区域,确定所述可选范围在所述第一最大视角区域的可选左限。If it is determined according to the comparison result that the first left limit of the first maximum viewing angle area exceeds the second left limit of the second maximum viewing angle area, then based on the first left limit, the second left limit and the The horizontal viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length determines that the selectable range is the selectable left limit of the first maximum viewing angle area.
  8. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述当前姿态角是当前偏航角;The method according to claim 1, wherein the current attitude angle is a current yaw angle;
    所述根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,包括:The determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result includes:
    如果根据比较结果确定所述第二最大视角区域的第二右限超出所述第一最大视角区域的第一右限,则基于所述第二右限、所述第一右限、和与所述第一焦距对应的水平方向视角区域,确定所述可选范围在所述第一最大视角区域的可选右限。If it is determined according to the comparison result that the second right limit of the second maximum viewing angle area exceeds the first right limit of the first maximum viewing angle area, then based on the second right limit, the first right limit, and the The horizontal viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length determines that the selectable range is at the selectable right limit of the first maximum viewing angle area.
  9. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,应用于拍摄端的控制端,还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the control terminal applied to the camera terminal further comprises:
    显示所述可选范围的多个边界中的至少一个。At least one of the multiple boundaries of the selectable range is displayed.
  10. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围之后,还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein after the determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result, the method further comprises:
    确定所述待处理区域,其中,所述第二最大视角区域包括所述待处理区域;以及Determining the area to be processed, wherein the second maximum viewing angle area includes the area to be processed; and
    基于所述第二焦距和所述待处理区域确定拍照关联信息,以便基于所述拍照关联信息获取所述待处理区域在所述第二焦距下的至少一个第二图像。Determine photographing related information based on the second focal length and the to-be-processed area, so as to acquire at least one second image of the to-be-processed area at the second focal length based on the photographing-related information.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述确定所述待处理区域之前,还包括:The method according to claim 10, characterized in that, before said determining the area to be processed, further comprising:
    获取候选待处理区域;Obtain candidate areas to be processed;
    所述确定所述待处理区域,包括:The determining the area to be processed includes:
    如果确定所述候选待处理区域未超出所述可选范围,则确定所述候选待处理区域为所述待处理区域。If it is determined that the candidate to-be-processed area does not exceed the selectable range, it is determined that the candidate to-be-processed area is the to-be-processed area.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述获取候选待处理区域之后,还包括:The method according to claim 11, characterized in that, after said obtaining the candidate to-be-processed area, the method further comprises:
    如果确定所述候选待处理区域超出所述可选范围,则输出提示信息。If it is determined that the candidate to-be-processed area exceeds the selectable range, output prompt information.
  13. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述确定所述待处理区域,包括:The method according to claim 10, wherein the determining the area to be processed comprises:
    基于图像识别算法确定所述待处理区域。The region to be processed is determined based on an image recognition algorithm.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述基于图像识别算法确定所述待处理区域包括:The method according to claim 13, wherein the determining the area to be processed based on an image recognition algorithm comprises:
    对所述第一图像进行图像识别,确定待处理对象;以及Perform image recognition on the first image to determine the object to be processed; and
    将所述待处理对象所在区域作为所述待处理区域。The area where the object to be processed is located is used as the area to be processed.
  15. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述基于图像识别算法确定所述待处理区域包括:The method according to claim 13, wherein the determining the area to be processed based on an image recognition algorithm comprises:
    基于预设任务以及图像识别算法从所述第一图像中确定所述待处理区域。The region to be processed is determined from the first image based on a preset task and an image recognition algorithm.
  16. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述拍照关联信息包括:拍摄位姿序列信息。The method according to claim 10, wherein the photographing related information comprises: photographing pose sequence information.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述拍摄位姿序列信息是基于拍摄组合信息确定的,所述拍摄组合信息是基于所述第二焦距和所述待处理区域确定的。The method according to claim 16, wherein the photographing pose sequence information is determined based on photographing combination information, and the photographing combination information is determined based on the second focal length and the area to be processed.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述拍摄组合信息包括:拍照次数,以及每次拍照的待拍照区域;The method according to claim 17, wherein the photographing combination information comprises: the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph;
    所述基于第二焦距和所述待处理区域确定拍照关联信息包括:The determining the photographing associated information based on the second focal length and the area to be processed includes:
    基于所述第二焦距和所述待处理区域,确定拍照次数以及每次拍照的待拍照区域;以及Based on the second focal length and the area to be processed, determining the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph; and
    基于所述待拍照区域确定所述拍摄位姿序列信息;Determining the photographing pose sequence information based on the area to be photographed;
    其中,所述拍摄位姿序列信息中的每个拍摄位姿对应一个所述待拍照区域,以便在所述拍摄位姿序列信息的各个拍摄位姿下,以所述第二焦距拍摄与所述待拍照区域对应的第二图像。Wherein, each shooting pose in the shooting pose sequence information corresponds to one of the to-be-photographed areas, so that in each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information, shooting with the second focal length The second image corresponding to the area to be photographed.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述基于所述第二焦距和所述待处理区域,确定拍照次数以及每次拍照的待拍照区域,包括:The method according to claim 18, wherein the determining the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph based on the second focal length and the area to be processed comprises:
    基于图像传感器尺寸和所述第二焦距确定与所述第二焦距对应的视角区域;Determining a viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length based on the size of the image sensor and the second focal length;
    基于所述待处理区域和与所述第二焦距对应的视角区域确定拍照次数,以及每次拍照的待拍照区域;Determining the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph based on the area to be processed and the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length;
    其中,多个所述待拍照区域构成的区域包括所述待处理区域。Wherein, the area formed by a plurality of the to-be-photographed areas includes the to-be-processed area.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述基于所述待处理区域和与所述第二焦距对应的视角区域确定拍照次数,以及每次拍照的待拍照区域,包括:The method of claim 19, wherein the determining the number of photographs based on the area to be processed and the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length, and the area to be photographed for each photograph, comprises:
    基于所述待处理区域、与所述第二焦距对应的视角区域和所述待拍照区域之间的图像重叠比例确定拍照次数,以及每次拍照的待拍照区域。The number of photographing times and the area to be photographed for each photograph are determined based on the image overlap ratio between the area to be processed, the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length, and the area to be photographed.
  21. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述基于所述待拍照区域确定所述拍摄位姿序列信息,包括:The method according to claim 18, wherein the determining the photographing pose sequence information based on the area to be photographed comprises:
    基于所述第一焦距下的相机当前位姿和第二焦距角度位置偏差确定与每次拍照的待拍照区域对应的拍摄位姿,并将确定的所有拍摄位姿的集合作为所述拍摄位姿序列信息。Determine the shooting pose corresponding to the area to be photographed each time based on the current pose of the camera at the first focal length and the angular position deviation of the second focal length, and use the set of all the determined shooting poses as the shooting pose Sequence information.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二焦距角度位置偏差通过以下方式确定:The method according to claim 21, wherein the second focal length angular position deviation is determined in the following manner:
    确定与所述第二焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置和与所述第一焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置之间的第一偏差;Determining the first deviation between the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length;
    确定所述待处理区域的指定位置和与所述第一焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置之间的第二偏差;Determining a second deviation between the designated position of the area to be processed and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length;
    确定所述待拍照区域的指定位置与所述待处理区域的指定位置之间的第三偏差;以及Determine the third deviation between the designated position of the area to be photographed and the designated position of the area to be processed; and
    基于所述第一偏差、所述第二偏差和所述第三偏差确定所述待拍照区域与所述第一焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置之间的第二焦距角度位置偏差。Determine a second focal length angular position deviation between the to-be-photographed area and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length based on the first deviation, the second deviation, and the third deviation.
  23. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述基于所述待拍照区域确定拍摄位姿序列之后,还包括:The method according to claim 18, characterized in that, after the determination of the shooting pose sequence based on the area to be photographed, the method further comprises:
    控制拍摄端在所述拍摄位姿序列信息的各个拍摄位姿下,以所述第二焦距拍摄与所述待拍照区域对应的第二图像。Control the shooting end to shoot a second image corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information.
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的方法,其特征在于,所述拍摄端包括拍摄装置,所述控制拍摄端在所述拍摄位姿序列信息的各个拍摄位姿下,以所述第二焦距拍摄与所述待拍照区域对应的第二图像,包括:22. The method according to claim 23, wherein the shooting end comprises a shooting device, and the controlling the shooting end is to shoot at the second focal length under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information. The second image corresponding to the area to be photographed includes:
    通过姿态调整装置控制所述拍摄装置依次处于所述拍摄位姿序列信息中的各个拍摄位姿,并控制所述拍摄装置在各个所述拍摄位姿下,以所述第二焦距拍摄与所述待拍照区域分别对应的第二图像。Through the posture adjustment device, the camera is controlled to be in each shooting pose in the shooting pose sequence information in sequence, and the camera is controlled to shoot with the second focal length in each of the shooting poses. The second image corresponding to the area to be photographed.
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的方法,其特征在于,所述姿态调整装置设置在可移动平台上。The method according to claim 24, wherein the posture adjustment device is arranged on a movable platform.
  26. 根据权利要求23所述的方法,其特征在于,在控制所述拍摄端在所述拍摄位姿序列信息的各拍摄位姿下,以所述第二焦距拍摄与所述待拍照区域对应的第二图像之后,还包括:The method according to claim 23, characterized in that, under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information, the shooting end is controlled to shoot the second focal length corresponding to the area to be photographed. After the second image, it also includes:
    关联地存储所述第一图像和所述第二图像。The first image and the second image are stored in association.
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的方法,其特征在于,所述关联地存储所述第一图像和所述第二图像包括:The method according to claim 26, wherein said storing said first image and said second image in association comprises:
    确定所述第二图像与所述待处理区域之间的第一映射关系,并且确定所述待处理区域与所述第一图像之间的第二映射关系;以及Determining a first mapping relationship between the second image and the area to be processed, and determining a second mapping relationship between the area to be processed and the first image; and
    存储所述第一图像、所述待处理区域、所述第二图像、所述第一映射关系和所述第二映射关系。The first image, the region to be processed, the second image, the first mapping relationship, and the second mapping relationship are stored.
  28. 根据权利要求26所述的方法,其特征在于,应用于拍摄端,所述第二图像为未经处理的拍摄图像。The method according to claim 26, wherein when applied to a shooting end, the second image is an unprocessed shooting image.
  29. 根据权利要求26所述的方法,其特征在于,应用于拍摄端的控制端,所述第二图像为经处理后的拍摄图像,所述第二图像的分辨率小于未经处理的拍摄图像的分辨率。The method according to claim 26, wherein the second image is a processed captured image, and the resolution of the second image is smaller than that of an unprocessed captured image. Rate.
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to claim 29, further comprising:
    如果接收到用于查看所述第二图像的操作指令,则从所述拍摄端获取所述第二图像对应的未经处理的拍摄图像;If an operation instruction for viewing the second image is received, obtaining an unprocessed photographed image corresponding to the second image from the photographing terminal;
    显示所述第二图像对应的未经处理的拍摄图像。The unprocessed captured image corresponding to the second image is displayed.
  31. 根据权利要求23所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述控制拍摄端在所述拍摄位姿序列的各拍摄位姿下,以所述第二焦距拍摄与所述待拍照区域对应的第二图像之后,还包括:22. The method according to claim 23, characterized in that, in each of the shooting poses of the shooting pose sequence at the control shooting end, the second focal length corresponding to the area to be photographed is shot at the second focal length. After the image, it also includes:
    获取第三图像,所述第三图像是基于所述第二图像合成的;以及Acquiring a third image, the third image being synthesized based on the second image; and
    关联地存储所述第一图像和所述第三图像。The first image and the third image are stored in association.
  32. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一图像和所述第二图像是变焦拍摄装置分别在所述第一焦距和所述第二焦距下拍摄的。The method according to claim 1, wherein the first image and the second image are taken by a zoom camera at the first focal length and the second focal length, respectively.
  33. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一图像是第一拍摄装置拍摄的,所述第二图像是第二拍摄装置拍摄的;其中,所述第一拍摄装置的焦距至少部分与所述第二拍摄装置的焦距不同。The method according to claim 1, wherein the first image is taken by a first photographing device, and the second image is taken by a second photographing device; wherein the focal length of the first photographing device is at least The focal length of part is different from that of the second camera.
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一拍摄装置和所述第二拍摄装置中至少一个的焦距可调。The method according to claim 33, wherein the focal length of at least one of the first photographing device and the second photographing device is adjustable.
  35. 根据权利要求33所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一拍摄装置是广角相机,所述第二拍摄装置是长焦相机。The method of claim 33, wherein the first camera is a wide-angle camera, and the second camera is a telephoto camera.
  36. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二焦距包括以下任意一种:固定焦距、预设焦距、基于焦距算法确定的焦距、基于传感器确定的焦距和用户选定的焦距。The method according to claim 1, wherein the second focal length comprises any one of the following: a fixed focal length, a preset focal length, a focal length determined based on a focal length algorithm, a focal length determined based on a sensor, and a focal length selected by a user.
  37. 根据权利要求36所述的方法,其特征在于,所述基于传感器确定的焦距包括:基于距离信息确定的焦距,所述距离信息是通过激光测距仪确定的。The method according to claim 36, wherein the focal length determined based on the sensor comprises: a focal length determined based on distance information, the distance information being determined by a laser rangefinder.
  38. 一种图像处理装置,其特征在于,所述装置包括:An image processing device, characterized in that the device includes:
    一个或多个处理器;以及One or more processors; and
    计算机可读存储介质,用于存储一个或多个计算机程序,所述计算机程序在被所述处理器执行时,实现:A computer-readable storage medium is used to store one or more computer programs, and when the computer programs are executed by the processor, they realize:
    获得当前姿态角下与第一焦距对应的第一最大视角区域,并且获得与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域;Obtaining a first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length under the current attitude angle, and obtaining a second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length;
    将所述第一最大视角区域和所述第二最大视角区域进行比较;以及Comparing the first maximum viewing angle area and the second maximum viewing angle area; and
    根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,以便于获取所述待处理区域在所述第二焦距下的至少一个第二图像,所述第一图像是在所述第一焦距下获取的;Determine the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result, so as to obtain at least one second image of the area to be processed at the second focal length, where the first image is in the first image. Obtained at focal length;
    其中,所述第二焦距大于所述第一焦距。Wherein, the second focal length is greater than the first focal length.
  39. 根据权利要求38所述的装置,其特征在于,所述与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域是基于姿态调整装置的最大可转动角度确定的。The device according to claim 38, wherein the second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length is determined based on the maximum rotatable angle of the posture adjustment device.
  40. 根据权利要求38所述的装置,其特征在于,所述根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,包括:The device according to claim 38, wherein the determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result comprises:
    如果根据比较结果确定所述第二最大视角区域包括所述第一最大视角区域,则确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围为所述第一图像中的任意区域。If it is determined according to the comparison result that the second maximum viewing angle area includes the first maximum viewing angle area, it is determined that the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image is any area in the first image.
  41. 根据权利要求38所述的装置,其特征在于,所述根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,包括:The device according to claim 38, wherein the determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result comprises:
    如果根据比较结果确定所述第二最大视角区域包括部分所述第一最大视角区域,则确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围为所述第一最大视角区域和所述第二最大视角区域的重叠区域。If it is determined according to the comparison result that the second maximum viewing angle area includes part of the first maximum viewing angle area, it is determined that the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image is the first maximum viewing angle area and the second maximum viewing angle area. The overlapping area of the viewing angle area.
  42. 根据权利要求38所述的装置,其特征在于,所述当前姿态角是当前俯仰角;The device according to claim 38, wherein the current attitude angle is a current pitch angle;
    所述根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,包括:The determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result includes:
    如果根据比较结果确定所述第一最大视角区域的第一上限超出所述第二最大视角区域的第二上限,则基于所述第一上限、所述第二上限和与所述第一焦距对应的垂直方向视角区域,确定所述可选范围在所述第一最大视角区域的可选上限。If it is determined according to the comparison result that the first upper limit of the first maximum angle of view area exceeds the second upper limit of the second maximum angle of view area, then based on the first upper limit, the second upper limit, and corresponding to the first focal length The vertical viewing angle area is determined to determine the selectable upper limit of the selectable range in the first maximum viewing angle area.
  43. 根据权利要求38所述的装置,其特征在于,所述当前姿态角是当前俯仰角;The device according to claim 38, wherein the current attitude angle is a current pitch angle;
    所述根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,包括:The determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result includes:
    如果根据比较结果确定所述第二最大视角区域的第二下限超出所述第一最大视角区域的第一下限,则基于所述第二下限、所述第一下限、和与所述第一焦距对应的垂直方向视角区域,确定所述可选范围在所述第一最大视角区域的可选下限。If it is determined according to the comparison result that the second lower limit of the second maximum viewing angle area exceeds the first lower limit of the first maximum viewing angle area, then based on the second lower limit, the first lower limit, and the first focal length Corresponding to the vertical viewing angle area, it is determined that the selectable range is within the selectable lower limit of the first maximum viewing angle area.
  44. 根据权利要求38所述的装置,其特征在于,所述当前姿态角是当前偏航角;The device according to claim 38, wherein the current attitude angle is a current yaw angle;
    所述根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,包括:The determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result includes:
    如果根据比较结果确定所述第一最大视角区域的第一左限超出所述第二最大视角区域的第二左限,则基于所述第一左限、所述第二左限和与所述第一焦距对应的水平方向视角区域,确定所述可选范围在所述第一最大视角区域的可选左限。If it is determined according to the comparison result that the first left limit of the first maximum viewing angle area exceeds the second left limit of the second maximum viewing angle area, then based on the first left limit, the second left limit and the The horizontal viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length determines that the selectable range is the selectable left limit of the first maximum viewing angle area.
  45. 根据权利要求38所述的装置,其特征在于,所述当前姿态角是当前偏航角;The device according to claim 38, wherein the current attitude angle is a current yaw angle;
    所述根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,包括:The determining the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image according to the comparison result includes:
    如果根据比较结果确定所述第二最大视角区域的第二右限超出所述第一最大视角区域的第一右限,则基于所述第二右限、所述第一右限、和与所述第一焦距对应的水平方向视角区域,确定所述可选范围在所述第一最大视角区域的可选右限。If it is determined according to the comparison result that the second right limit of the second maximum viewing angle area exceeds the first right limit of the first maximum viewing angle area, then based on the second right limit, the first right limit, and the The horizontal viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length determines that the selectable range is at the selectable right limit of the first maximum viewing angle area.
  46. 根据权利要求38所述的装置,其特征在于,应用于拍摄端的控制端,所述计算机程序在被所述处理器执行时,还用于实现:The device according to claim 38, wherein, when applied to the control end of the shooting end, when the computer program is executed by the processor, it is further used to realize:
    显示所述可选范围的多个边界中的至少一个。At least one of the multiple boundaries of the selectable range is displayed.
  47. 根据权利要求38所述的装置,其特征在于,在所述根据比较结果确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围之后,所述计算机程序在被所述处理器执行时,还用于实现:The device according to claim 38, characterized in that, after the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image is determined according to the comparison result, when the computer program is executed by the processor, the computer program is further used for accomplish:
    确定所述待处理区域,其中,所述第二最大视角区域包括所述待处理区域;以及Determining the area to be processed, wherein the second maximum viewing angle area includes the area to be processed; and
    基于所述第二焦距和所述待处理区域确定拍照关联信息,以便基于所述拍照关联信息获取所述待处理区域在所述第二焦距下的至少一个第二图像。Determine photographing related information based on the second focal length and the to-be-processed area, so as to acquire at least one second image of the to-be-processed area at the second focal length based on the photographing-related information.
  48. 根据权利要求47所述的装置,其特征在于,在所述确定所述待处理区域之前,所述计算机程序在被所述处理器执行时,还用于实现:The device according to claim 47, wherein, before the determining the area to be processed, the computer program is further used to implement:
    获取候选待处理区域;Obtain candidate areas to be processed;
    所述确定所述待处理区域,包括:The determining the area to be processed includes:
    如果确定所述候选待处理区域未超出所述可选范围,则确定所述候选待处理区域为所述待处理区域。If it is determined that the candidate to-be-processed area does not exceed the selectable range, it is determined that the candidate to-be-processed area is the to-be-processed area.
  49. 根据权利要求48所述的装置,其特征在于,在所述获取候选待处理区域之后,所述计算机程序在被所述处理器执行时,还用于实现:The device according to claim 48, wherein, after the candidate area to be processed is obtained, when the computer program is executed by the processor, it is further used to implement:
    如果确定所述候选待处理区域超出所述可选范围,则输出提示信息。If it is determined that the candidate to-be-processed area exceeds the selectable range, output prompt information.
  50. 根据权利要求47所述的装置,其特征在于,所述确定所述待处理区域,包括:The device according to claim 47, wherein said determining the area to be processed comprises:
    基于图像识别算法确定所述待处理区域。The region to be processed is determined based on an image recognition algorithm.
  51. 根据权利要求50所述的装置,其特征在于,所述基于图像识别算法确定所述待处理区域包括:The device of claim 50, wherein the determining the area to be processed based on an image recognition algorithm comprises:
    对所述第一图像进行图像识别,确定待处理对象;以及Perform image recognition on the first image to determine the object to be processed; and
    将所述待处理对象所在区域作为所述待处理区域。The area where the object to be processed is located is used as the area to be processed.
  52. 根据权利要求50所述的装置,其特征在于,所述基于图像识别算法确定所述待处理区域包括:The device of claim 50, wherein the determining the area to be processed based on an image recognition algorithm comprises:
    基于预设任务以及图像识别算法从所述第一图像中确定所述待处理区域。The region to be processed is determined from the first image based on a preset task and an image recognition algorithm.
  53. 根据权利要求47所述的装置,其特征在于,所述拍照关联信息包括:拍摄位姿序列信息。The device according to claim 47, wherein the photographing related information comprises: photographing pose sequence information.
  54. 根据权利要求53所述的装置,其特征在于,所述拍摄位姿序列信息是基于拍摄组合信息确定的,所述拍摄组合信息是基于所述第二焦距和所述待处理区域确定的。The device according to claim 53, wherein the photographing pose sequence information is determined based on photographing combination information, and the photographing combination information is determined based on the second focal length and the area to be processed.
  55. 根据权利要求54所述的装置,其特征在于,所述拍摄组合信息包括:拍照次数,以及每次拍照的待拍照区域;The device according to claim 54, wherein the photographing combination information comprises: the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph;
    所述基于第二焦距和所述待处理区域确定拍照关联信息包括:The determining the photographing associated information based on the second focal length and the area to be processed includes:
    基于所述第二焦距和所述待处理区域,确定拍照次数以及每次拍照的待拍照区域;以及Based on the second focal length and the area to be processed, determining the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph; and
    基于所述待拍照区域确定所述拍摄位姿序列信息;Determining the photographing pose sequence information based on the area to be photographed;
    其中,所述拍摄位姿序列信息中的每个拍摄位姿对应一个所述待拍照区域,以便在所述拍摄位姿序列信息的各个拍摄位姿下,以所述第二焦距拍摄与所述待拍照区域对应的第二图像。Wherein, each shooting pose in the shooting pose sequence information corresponds to one of the to-be-photographed areas, so that in each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information, shooting with the second focal length The second image corresponding to the area to be photographed.
  56. 根据权利要求55所述的装置,其特征在于,所述基于所述第二焦距和所述待处理区域,确定拍照次数以及每次拍照的待拍照区域,包括:The device according to claim 55, wherein the determining the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph based on the second focal length and the area to be processed comprises:
    基于图像传感器尺寸和所述第二焦距确定与所述第二焦距对应的视角区域;Determining a viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length based on the size of the image sensor and the second focal length;
    基于所述待处理区域和与所述第二焦距对应的视角区域确定拍照次数,以及每次拍照的待拍照区域;Determining the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph based on the area to be processed and the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length;
    其中,多个所述待拍照区域构成的区域包括所述待处理区域。Wherein, the area formed by a plurality of the to-be-photographed areas includes the to-be-processed area.
  57. 根据权利要求56所述的装置,其特征在于,所述基于所述待处理区域和与所述第二焦距对应的视角区域确定拍照次数,以及每次拍照的待拍照区域,包括:The device according to claim 56, wherein the determining the number of photographs based on the area to be processed and the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length, and the area to be photographed for each photograph, comprises:
    基于所述待处理区域、与所述第二焦距对应的视角区域和所述待拍照区域之间的图像重叠比例确定拍照次数,以及每次拍照的待拍照区域。The number of photographing times and the area to be photographed for each photograph are determined based on the image overlap ratio between the area to be processed, the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length, and the area to be photographed.
  58. 根据权利要求55所述的装置,其特征在于,所述基于所述待拍照区域确定所述拍摄位姿序列信息,包括:The device according to claim 55, wherein the determining the shooting pose sequence information based on the area to be photographed comprises:
    基于所述第一焦距下的相机当前位姿和第二焦距角度位置偏差确定与每次拍照的待拍照区域对应的拍摄位姿,并将确定的所有拍摄位姿的集合作为所述拍摄位姿序列信息。Determine the shooting pose corresponding to the area to be photographed each time based on the current pose of the camera at the first focal length and the angular position deviation of the second focal length, and use the set of all the determined shooting poses as the shooting pose Sequence information.
  59. 根据权利要求58所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二焦距角度位置偏差通过以下方式确定:The device according to claim 58, wherein the deviation of the second focal length angle position is determined in the following manner:
    确定与所述第二焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置和与所述第一焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置之间的第一偏差;Determining the first deviation between the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length;
    确定所述待处理区域的指定位置和与所述第一焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置之间的第二偏差;Determining a second deviation between the designated position of the area to be processed and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length;
    确定所述待拍照区域的指定位置与所述待处理区域的指定位置之间的第三偏差;以及Determine the third deviation between the designated position of the area to be photographed and the designated position of the area to be processed; and
    基于所述第一偏差、所述第二偏差和所述第三偏差确定所述待拍照区域与所述第一焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置之间的第二焦距角度位置偏差。Determine a second focal length angular position deviation between the to-be-photographed area and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length based on the first deviation, the second deviation, and the third deviation.
  60. 根据权利要求55所述的装置,其特征在于,在所述基于所述待拍照区域确定拍摄位姿序列之后,所述计算机程序在被所述处理器执行时,还用于实现:The device according to claim 55, wherein, after the photographing pose sequence is determined based on the area to be photographed, when the computer program is executed by the processor, it is further configured to implement:
    控制拍摄端在所述拍摄位姿序列信息的各个拍摄位姿下,以所述第二焦距拍摄与所述待拍照区域对应的第二图像。Control the shooting end to shoot a second image corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information.
  61. 根据权利要求60所述的装置,其特征在于,所述拍摄端包括拍摄装置,所述控制拍摄端在所述拍摄位姿序列信息的各个拍摄位姿下,以所述第二焦距拍摄与所述待拍照区域对应的第二图像,包括:The device according to claim 60, wherein the photographing terminal comprises a photographing device, and the controlling photographing terminal takes a photograph with the second focal length under each photographing pose of the photographing pose sequence information. The second image corresponding to the area to be photographed includes:
    通过姿态调整装置控制所述拍摄装置依次处于所述拍摄位姿序列信息中的各个拍摄位姿,并控制所述拍摄装置在各个所述拍摄位姿下,以所述第二焦距拍摄与所述待拍照区域分别对应的第二图像。Through the posture adjustment device, the camera is controlled to be in each shooting pose in the shooting pose sequence information in sequence, and the camera is controlled to shoot with the second focal length in each of the shooting poses. The second image corresponding to the area to be photographed.
  62. 根据权利要求61所述的装置,其特征在于,所述姿态调整装置设置在可移动平台上。The device according to claim 61, wherein the posture adjustment device is arranged on a movable platform.
  63. 根据权利要求60所述的装置,其特征在于,在控制所述拍摄端在所述拍摄位姿序列信息的各拍摄位姿下,以所述第二焦距拍摄与所述待拍照区域对应的第二图像之后,所述计算机程序在被所述处理器执行时,还用于实现:The device according to claim 60, wherein the shooting end is controlled to shoot the second focal length corresponding to the area to be photographed under each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence information. After the second image, when the computer program is executed by the processor, it is also used to realize:
    关联地存储所述第一图像和所述第二图像。The first image and the second image are stored in association.
  64. 根据权利要求63所述的装置,其特征在于,所述关联地存储所述第一图像和所述第二图像包括:The device according to claim 63, wherein said storing said first image and said second image in association comprises:
    确定所述第二图像与所述待处理区域之间的第一映射关系,并且确定所述待处理区域与所述第一图像之间的第二映射关系;以及Determining a first mapping relationship between the second image and the area to be processed, and determining a second mapping relationship between the area to be processed and the first image; and
    存储所述第一图像、所述待处理区域、所述第二图像、所述第一映射关系和所述第二映射关系。The first image, the region to be processed, the second image, the first mapping relationship, and the second mapping relationship are stored.
  65. 根据权利要求63所述的装置,其特征在于,应用于拍摄端,所述第二图像为未经处理的拍摄图像。The device according to claim 63, wherein when applied to a shooting end, the second image is an unprocessed shooting image.
  66. 根据权利要求63所述的装置,其特征在于,应用于拍摄端的控制端,所述第二图像为经处理后的拍摄图像,所述第二图像的分辨率小于未经处理的拍摄图像的分辨率。The device according to claim 63, wherein the second image is a processed captured image, and the resolution of the second image is smaller than that of an unprocessed captured image. Rate.
  67. 根据权利要求66所述的装置,其特征在于,所述计算机程序在被所述处理器执行时,还用于实现:The device according to claim 66, wherein the computer program, when being executed by the processor, is further used to implement:
    如果接收到用于查看所述第二图像的操作指令,则从所述拍摄端获取所述第二图像对应的未经处理的拍摄图像;If an operation instruction for viewing the second image is received, obtaining an unprocessed photographed image corresponding to the second image from the photographing terminal;
    显示所述第二图像对应的未经处理的拍摄图像。The unprocessed captured image corresponding to the second image is displayed.
  68. 根据权利要求60所述的装置,其特征在于,在所述控制拍摄端在所述拍摄位姿序列的各拍摄位姿下,以所述第二焦距拍摄与所述待拍照区域对应的第二图像之后,所述计算机程序在被所述处理器执行时,还用于实现:The device according to claim 60, characterized in that, in each shooting pose of the shooting pose sequence at the control shooting end, the second focal length corresponding to the area to be photographed is shot at the second focal length. After the image, when the computer program is executed by the processor, it is also used to realize:
    获取第三图像,所述第三图像是基于所述第二图像合成的;以及Acquiring a third image, the third image being synthesized based on the second image; and
    关联地存储所述第一图像和所述第三图像。The first image and the third image are stored in association.
  69. 根据权利要求38所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一图像和所述第二图像是变焦拍摄装置分别在所述第一焦距和所述第二焦距下拍摄的。The device according to claim 38, wherein the first image and the second image are taken by a zoom camera at the first focal length and the second focal length, respectively.
  70. 根据权利要求38所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一图像是第一拍摄装置拍摄的,所述第二图像是第二拍摄装置拍摄的;其中,所述第一拍摄装置的焦距至少部分与所述第二拍摄装置的焦距不同。The device according to claim 38, wherein the first image is taken by a first photographing device, and the second image is taken by a second photographing device; wherein the focal length of the first photographing device is at least The focal length of part is different from that of the second camera.
  71. 根据权利要求70所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一拍摄装置和所述第二拍摄装置中至少一个的焦距可调。The device according to claim 70, wherein the focal length of at least one of the first photographing device and the second photographing device is adjustable.
  72. 根据权利要求70所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一拍摄装置是广角相机,所述第二拍摄装置是长焦相机。The device of claim 70, wherein the first photographing device is a wide-angle camera, and the second photographing device is a telephoto camera.
  73. 根据权利要求38所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二焦距包括以下任意一种:固定焦距、预设焦距、基于焦距算法确定的焦距、基于传感器确定的焦距和用户选定的焦距。The device according to claim 38, wherein the second focal length comprises any one of the following: a fixed focal length, a preset focal length, a focal length determined based on a focal length algorithm, a focal length determined based on a sensor, and a focal length selected by a user.
  74. 根据权利要求73所述的装置,其特征在于,所述基于传感器确定的焦距包括:基于距离信息确定的焦距,所述距离信息是通过激光测距仪确定的。The device according to claim 73, wherein the focal length determined based on the sensor comprises: a focal length determined based on distance information, and the distance information is determined by a laser rangefinder.
  75. 一种图像处理系统,其特征在于,所述图像处理系统包括:An image processing system, characterized in that the image processing system includes:
    拍照装置以及与所述拍照装置通信连接的控制终端;A photographing device and a control terminal communicatively connected with the photographing device;
    所述控制装置用于获取待处理区域;The control device is used to obtain the area to be processed;
    所述拍照装置用于获得所述拍照装置在当前姿态角下与所述第一焦距对应的第一最大视角区域,并且获得与所述第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域;将所述第一最大视角区域和所述第二最大视角区域进行比较;以及根据比较结果确定所述待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围,以便控制所述拍照装置获取待处理区域在所述第二焦距下的至少一个第二图像,所述第一图像是在所述第一焦距下获取的;其中,所述第二焦距大于所述第一焦距。The photographing device is used to obtain a first maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length of the photographing device under the current attitude angle, and obtaining a second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length; A maximum viewing angle area and the second maximum viewing angle area are compared; and the selectable range of the to-be-processed area in the first image is determined according to the comparison result, so as to control the photographing device to obtain that the to-be-processed area is in the second At least one second image at a focal length, the first image being acquired at the first focal length; wherein the second focal length is greater than the first focal length.
  76. 根据权利要求75所述的系统,其特征在于,所述与第二焦距对应的第二最大视角区域是基于姿态调整装置的最大可转动角度确定的。The system according to claim 75, wherein the second maximum viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length is determined based on the maximum rotatable angle of the posture adjustment device.
  77. 根据权利要求75所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置具体用于如果根据比较结果确定所述第二最大视角区域包括所述第一最大视角区域,则确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围为所述第一图像中的任意区域。The system according to claim 75, wherein the photographing device is specifically configured to determine that the area to be processed is in the first image if it is determined according to the comparison result that the second maximum viewing angle area includes the first maximum viewing angle area. The selectable range in is any area in the first image.
  78. 根据权利要求75所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置具体用于如果根据比较结果确定所述第二最大视角区域包括部分所述第一最大视角区域,则确定待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围为所述第一最大视角区域和所述第二最大视角区域的重叠区域。The system according to claim 75, wherein the photographing device is specifically configured to determine that the area to be processed is in the first area if it is determined according to the comparison result that the second maximum angle of view area includes part of the first area of maximum angle of view. The selectable range in the image is the overlapping area of the first maximum viewing angle area and the second maximum viewing angle area.
  79. 根据权利要求75所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置具体用于所述当前姿态角是当前俯仰角时,如果根据比较结果确定所述第一最大视角区域的第一上限超出所述第二最大视角区域的第二上限,则基于所述第一上限、所述第二上限和与所述第一焦距对应的垂直方向视角区域,确定所述可选范围在所述第一最大视角区域的可选上限。The system according to claim 75, wherein the photographing device is specifically used when the current attitude angle is the current pitch angle, if it is determined according to the comparison result that the first upper limit of the first maximum viewing angle area exceeds the The second upper limit of the second maximum viewing angle area is determined based on the first upper limit, the second upper limit, and the vertical viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length to determine that the selectable range is within the first maximum viewing angle The optional upper limit of the area.
  80. 根据权利要求75所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置具体用于所述当前姿态角是当前俯仰角时,如果根据比较结果确定所述第二最大视角区域的第二下限超出所述第一最大视角区域的第一下限,则基于所述第二下限、所述第一下限、和与所述第一焦距对应的垂直方向视角区域,确定所述可选范围在所述第一最大视角区域的可选下限。The system according to claim 75, wherein the photographing device is specifically used when the current attitude angle is the current pitch angle, if it is determined according to the comparison result that the second lower limit of the second maximum viewing angle area exceeds the The first lower limit of the first maximum viewing angle area is determined based on the second lower limit, the first lower limit, and the vertical viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length. The optional lower limit of the viewing angle area.
  81. 根据权利要求75所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置具体用于所述当前姿态角是当前偏航角时,如果根据比较结果确定所述第一最大视角区域的第一左限超出所述第二最大视角区域的第二左限,则基于所述第一左限、所述第二左限和与所述第一焦距对应的水平方向视角区域,确定所述可选范围在所述第一最大视角区域的可选左限。The system according to claim 75, wherein the photographing device is specifically used when the current attitude angle is the current yaw angle, if it is determined according to the comparison result that the first left limit of the first maximum viewing angle area exceeds The second left limit of the second maximum viewing angle area is determined based on the first left limit, the second left limit, and the horizontal viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length. The optional left limit of the first maximum viewing angle area.
  82. 根据权利要求75所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置具体用于所述当前姿态角是当前偏航角时,如果根据比较结果确定所述第二最大视角区域的第二右限超出所述第一最大视角区域的第一右限,则基于所述第二右限、所述第一右限、和与所述第一焦距对应的水平方向视角区域,确定所述可选范围在所述第一最大视角区域的可选右限。The system according to claim 75, wherein the photographing device is specifically used when the current attitude angle is the current yaw angle, if it is determined according to the comparison result that the second right limit of the second maximum viewing angle area exceeds The first right limit of the first maximum viewing angle area is determined based on the second right limit, the first right limit, and the horizontal viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length. The optional right limit of the first maximum viewing angle area.
  83. 根据权利要求75所述的系统,其特征在于,所述控制终端包括显示界面,所述控制终端还用于通过所述显示界面显示所述可选范围的多个边界中的至少一个。The system according to claim 75, wherein the control terminal comprises a display interface, and the control terminal is further configured to display at least one of the multiple boundaries of the selectable range through the display interface.
  84. 根据权利要求75所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置还用于在所述根据比较结果确定所述待处理区域在第一图像中的可选范围之后,确定所述待处理区域,其中,所述第二最大视角区域包括所述待处理区域;以及基于所述第二焦距和所述待处理区域确定拍照关联信息,以便控制所述拍照装置基于所述拍照关联信息获取所述待处理区域在所述第二焦距下的至少一个第二图像。The system according to claim 75, wherein the photographing device is further configured to determine the area to be processed after the selectable range of the area to be processed in the first image is determined according to the comparison result, Wherein, the second maximum viewing angle area includes the to-be-processed area; and determining photographing related information based on the second focal length and the to-be-processed area, so as to control the photographing device to obtain the to-be-processed area based on the photographing related information At least one second image of the processing area at the second focal length.
  85. 根据权利要求84所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置还用于在所述确定所述待处理区域之前,获取候选待处理区域;并具体用于如果确定所述候选待处理区域未超出所述可选范围,则确定所述候选待处理区域为所述待处理区域。The system according to claim 84, wherein the photographing device is further configured to obtain a candidate to-be-processed area before the determination of the to-be-processed area; Beyond the selectable range, it is determined that the candidate to-be-processed area is the to-be-processed area.
  86. 根据权利要求85所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置还用于在所述获取候选待处理区域之后,如果确定所述候选待处理区域超出所述可选范围,则输出提示信息。The system according to claim 85, wherein the photographing device is further configured to output prompt information if it is determined that the candidate to-be-processed area exceeds the selectable range after the acquisition of the candidate to-be-processed area.
  87. 根据权利要求84所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置具体用于基于图像识别算法确定所述待处理区域。The system according to claim 84, wherein the photographing device is specifically configured to determine the area to be processed based on an image recognition algorithm.
  88. 根据权利要求87所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置具体用于对所述第一图像进行图像识别,确定待处理对象;以及将所述待处理对象所在区域作为所述待处理区域。The system according to claim 87, wherein the photographing device is specifically configured to perform image recognition on the first image to determine the object to be processed; and use the area where the object to be processed is located as the area to be processed .
  89. 根据权利要求87所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置具体用于基于预设任务以及图像识别算法从所述第一图像中确定所述待处理区域。The system according to claim 87, wherein the photographing device is specifically configured to determine the area to be processed from the first image based on a preset task and an image recognition algorithm.
  90. 根据权利要求84所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照关联信息包括:拍摄位姿序列信息。The system according to claim 84, wherein the photographing related information comprises: photographing pose sequence information.
  91. 根据权利要求90所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍摄位姿序列信息是基于拍摄组合信息确定的,所述拍摄组合信息是基于所述第二焦距和所述待处理区域确定的。The system according to claim 90, wherein the photographing pose sequence information is determined based on photographing combination information, and the photographing combination information is determined based on the second focal length and the area to be processed.
  92. 根据权利要求91所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍摄组合信息包括拍照次数,以及每次拍照的待拍照区域;The system according to claim 91, wherein the photographing combination information includes the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph;
    所述拍照装置具体用于基于所述第二焦距和所述待处理区域,确定拍照次数以及每次拍照的待拍照区域;以及基于所述待拍照区域确定所述拍摄位姿序列信息;其中,所述拍摄位姿序列信息中的每个拍摄位姿对应一个所述待拍照区域,以便所述拍照装置在所述拍摄位姿序列信息的各个拍摄位姿下,以所述第二焦距拍摄与所述待拍照区域对应的第二图像。The photographing device is specifically configured to determine the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph based on the second focal length and the area to be processed; and determine the photographing pose sequence information based on the area to be photographed; wherein, Each shooting pose in the shooting pose sequence information corresponds to one of the to-be-photographed areas, so that the photographing device can shoot at the second focal length under each shooting pose in the shooting pose sequence information. The second image corresponding to the area to be photographed.
  93. 根据权利要求92所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置具体用于基于图像传感器尺寸和所述第二焦距确定与所述第二焦距对应的视角区域;以及基于所述待处理区域和与所述第二焦距对应的视角区域确定拍照次数,以及每次拍照的待拍照区域;其中,多个所述待拍照区域构成的区域包括所述待处理区域。The system according to claim 92, wherein the photographing device is specifically configured to determine a viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length based on the size of the image sensor and the second focal length; and based on the to-be-processed area and The viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length determines the number of photographs and the area to be photographed for each photograph; wherein the area formed by a plurality of the areas to be photographed includes the area to be processed.
  94. 根据权利要求93所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置具体用于基于所述待处理区域、与所述第二焦距对应的视角区域和所述待拍照区域之间的图像重叠比例确定拍照次数,以及每次拍照的待拍照区域。The system according to claim 93, wherein the photographing device is specifically configured to determine the image overlap ratio between the area to be processed, the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length, and the area to be photographed The number of photos taken, and the area to be taken each time.
  95. 根据权利要求92所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置具体用于基于所述第一焦距下的相机当前位姿和第二焦距角度位置偏差确定与每次拍照的待拍照区域对应的拍摄位姿,并将确定的所有拍摄位姿的集合作为所述拍摄位姿序列信息。The system according to claim 92, wherein the photographing device is specifically configured to determine, based on the current pose of the camera at the first focal length and the angular position deviation of the second focal length, which corresponds to the area to be photographed each time a photograph is taken. The shooting pose, and the set of all the determined shooting poses is used as the shooting pose sequence information.
  96. 根据权利要求95所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置具体用于确定与所述第二焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置和与所述第一焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置之间的第一偏差;以及确定所述待处理区域的指定位置和与所述第一焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置之间的第二偏差;确定所述待拍照区域的指定位置与所述待处理区域的指定位置之间的第三偏差;以及基于所述第一偏差、所述第二偏差和所述第三偏差确定所述待拍照区域与所述第一焦距对应的视角区域的指定位置之间的第二焦距角度位置偏差。The system according to claim 95, wherein the photographing device is specifically configured to determine the distance between the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the second focal length and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length. And determine the second deviation between the designated position of the area to be processed and the designated position of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length; determine the designated position of the area to be photographed and the area to be processed The third deviation between the designated positions of the area; and the determination based on the first deviation, the second deviation, and the third deviation between the designated positions of the viewing angle area corresponding to the first focal length and the to-be-photographed area The angular position deviation of the second focal length between.
  97. 根据权利要求92所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置具体用于在所述拍摄位姿序列信息的各个拍摄位姿下,以所述第二焦距拍摄与所述待拍照区域对应的第二图像。The system according to claim 92, wherein the photographing device is specifically configured to photograph at the second focal length corresponding to the area to be photographed under each photographing pose of the photographing pose sequence information. The second image.
  98. 根据权利要求97所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置包括姿态调整装置和拍摄装置,所述拍照装置具体用于通过所述姿态调整装置控制所述拍摄装置依次处于所述拍摄位姿序列信息中的各个拍摄位姿,并控制所述 拍摄装置在各个所述拍摄位姿下,以所述第二焦距拍摄与所述待拍照区域分别对应的第二图像。The system according to claim 97, wherein the photographing device comprises a posture adjusting device and a photographing device, and the photographing device is specifically configured to control the photographing device to sequentially be in the photographing position and posture through the posture adjusting device. Each shooting pose in the sequence information is controlled, and the shooting device is controlled to shoot a second image corresponding to the area to be photographed at the second focal length in each of the shooting poses.
  99. 根据权利要求98所述的系统,其特征在于,所述姿态调整装置设置在可移动平台上。The system according to claim 98, wherein the posture adjustment device is arranged on a movable platform.
  100. 根据权利要求97所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置还用于在所述拍摄位姿序列信息的各拍摄位姿下,以所述第二焦距拍摄与所述待拍照区域对应的第二图像之后,关联地存储所述第一图像和所述第二图像。The system according to claim 97, wherein the photographing device is further configured to photograph at the second focal length corresponding to the area to be photographed under each photographing pose of the photographing pose sequence information. After the second image, the first image and the second image are stored in association.
  101. 根据权利要求100所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置具体用于确定所述第二图像与所述待处理区域之间的第一映射关系,并且确定所述待处理区域与所述第一图像之间的第二映射关系;以及存储所述第一图像、所述待处理区域、所述第二图像、所述第一映射关系和所述第二映射关系。The system according to claim 100, wherein the photographing device is specifically configured to determine a first mapping relationship between the second image and the area to be processed, and to determine the relationship between the area to be processed and the area to be processed. A second mapping relationship between the first images; and storing the first image, the area to be processed, the second image, the first mapping relationship, and the second mapping relationship.
  102. 根据权利要求100所述的系统,其特征在于,所述第二图像为未经处理的拍摄图像并存储于所述拍照装置。The system of claim 100, wherein the second image is an unprocessed captured image and is stored in the photographing device.
  103. 根据权利要求100所述的系统,其特征在于,所述第二图像为经处理后的拍摄图像并存储于所述控制终端,所述第二图像的分辨率小于未经处理的拍摄图像的分辨率。The system according to claim 100, wherein the second image is a processed captured image and stored in the control terminal, and the resolution of the second image is smaller than that of an unprocessed captured image. Rate.
  104. 根据权利要求103所述的系统,其特征在于,所述控制终端还包括显示界面,所述控制终端还用于如果接收到用于查看所述第二图像的操作指令,则从所述拍照装置获取所述第二图像对应的未经处理的拍摄图像;以及通过所述显示界面显示所述第二图像对应的未经处理的拍摄图像。The system according to claim 103, wherein the control terminal further comprises a display interface, and the control terminal is further configured to: Acquiring an unprocessed captured image corresponding to the second image; and displaying the unprocessed captured image corresponding to the second image through the display interface.
  105. 根据权利要求97所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置还用于在所述控制拍摄端在所述拍摄位姿序列的各拍摄位姿下,以所述第二焦距拍摄与所述待拍照区域对应的第二图像之后,获取第三图像,所述第三图像是基于所述第二图像合成的;以及关联地存储所述第一图像和所述第三图像。The system according to claim 97, wherein the photographing device is further configured to shoot at the second focal length at each photographing position of the photographing position sequence at the control photographing terminal. After the second image corresponding to the area to be photographed, a third image is obtained, the third image is synthesized based on the second image; and the first image and the third image are stored in association.
  106. 根据权利要求75所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置包括变焦拍摄装置,所述变焦拍摄装置用于分别在所述第一焦距和所述第二焦距下拍摄所述第一图像和所述第二图像。The system according to claim 75, wherein the camera device comprises a zoom camera device, the zoom camera device is used to capture the first image and the camera at the first focal length and the second focal length, respectively. The second image.
  107. 根据权利要求75所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置包括第一拍摄装置和第二拍摄装置;The system according to claim 75, wherein the photographing device comprises a first photographing device and a second photographing device;
    所述第一拍摄装置用于拍摄第一图像;The first photographing device is used to photograph a first image;
    所述第二拍摄装置用于拍摄第二图像;The second photographing device is used to photograph a second image;
    其中,所述第一拍摄装置的焦距至少部分与所述第二拍摄装置的焦距不同。Wherein, the focal length of the first photographing device is at least partially different from the focal length of the second photographing device.
  108. 根据权利要求107所述的系统,其特征在于,所述第一拍摄装置和所述第二拍摄装置中至少一个的焦距可调。The system according to claim 107, wherein the focal length of at least one of the first camera and the second camera is adjustable.
  109. 根据权利要求107所述的系统,其特征在于,所述第一拍摄装置是广角相机,所述第二拍摄装置是长焦相机。The system of claim 107, wherein the first photographing device is a wide-angle camera, and the second photographing device is a telephoto camera.
  110. 根据权利要求75所述的系统,其特征在于,所述第二焦距包括以下任意一种:固定焦距、预设焦距、基于焦距算法确定的焦距、基于传感器确定的焦距和用户选定的焦距。The system of claim 75, wherein the second focal length comprises any one of the following: a fixed focal length, a preset focal length, a focal length determined based on a focal length algorithm, a focal length determined based on a sensor, and a focal length selected by a user.
  111. 根据权利要求110所述的系统,其特征在于,所述拍照装置包括激光测距仪,所述激光测距仪用于测量距离信息,以基于距离信息确定所述第二焦距。The system according to claim 110, wherein the photographing device comprises a laser rangefinder, and the laser rangefinder is used to measure distance information to determine the second focal length based on the distance information.
  112. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,其存储有可执行指令,所述可执行指令在由一个或多个处理器执行时,可以使所述一个或多个处理器执行如权利要求1至37中任一项权利要求所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that it stores executable instructions that, when executed by one or more processors, can cause the one or more processors to execute as claimed in claim 1. The method of any one of claims to 37.
PCT/CN2020/077217 2020-02-28 2020-02-28 Image processing method, image processing apparatus and image processing system WO2021168804A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202080004280.7A CN112514366A (en) 2020-02-28 2020-02-28 Image processing method, image processing apparatus, and image processing system
PCT/CN2020/077217 WO2021168804A1 (en) 2020-02-28 2020-02-28 Image processing method, image processing apparatus and image processing system

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/077217 WO2021168804A1 (en) 2020-02-28 2020-02-28 Image processing method, image processing apparatus and image processing system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021168804A1 true WO2021168804A1 (en) 2021-09-02

Family

ID=74953160

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/077217 WO2021168804A1 (en) 2020-02-28 2020-02-28 Image processing method, image processing apparatus and image processing system

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN112514366A (en)
WO (1) WO2021168804A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115499565A (en) * 2022-08-23 2022-12-20 盯盯拍(深圳)技术股份有限公司 Image acquisition method, device and medium based on double lenses and automobile data recorder

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113688824B (en) * 2021-09-10 2024-02-27 福建汇川物联网技术科技股份有限公司 Information acquisition method, device and storage medium for construction node

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106791376A (en) * 2016-11-29 2017-05-31 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 Imaging device, control method, control device and electronic installation
CN107277371A (en) * 2017-07-27 2017-10-20 青岛海信移动通信技术股份有限公司 A kind of method and device in mobile terminal amplification picture region
WO2019147024A1 (en) * 2018-01-23 2019-08-01 광주과학기술원 Object detection method using two cameras having different focal distances, and apparatus therefor
CN110445978A (en) * 2019-06-24 2019-11-12 华为技术有限公司 A kind of image pickup method and equipment
CN110493526A (en) * 2019-09-10 2019-11-22 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Image processing method, device, equipment and medium based on more photographing modules

Family Cites Families (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP4348261B2 (en) * 2004-08-31 2009-10-21 Hoya株式会社 Trimming imaging device
EP3164987B1 (en) * 2014-07-01 2024-01-03 Apple Inc. Mobile camera system
CN105809618A (en) * 2014-12-31 2016-07-27 华为终端(东莞)有限公司 Picture processing method and device
CN106254780A (en) * 2016-08-31 2016-12-21 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 A kind of dual camera camera control method, photographing control device and terminal
CN110099213A (en) * 2019-04-26 2019-08-06 维沃移动通信(杭州)有限公司 A kind of image display control method and terminal
CN110602401A (en) * 2019-09-17 2019-12-20 维沃移动通信有限公司 Photographing method and terminal
CN110781879B (en) * 2019-10-31 2023-04-28 广东小天才科技有限公司 Click-to-read target identification method, system, storage medium and electronic equipment

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106791376A (en) * 2016-11-29 2017-05-31 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 Imaging device, control method, control device and electronic installation
CN107277371A (en) * 2017-07-27 2017-10-20 青岛海信移动通信技术股份有限公司 A kind of method and device in mobile terminal amplification picture region
WO2019147024A1 (en) * 2018-01-23 2019-08-01 광주과학기술원 Object detection method using two cameras having different focal distances, and apparatus therefor
CN110445978A (en) * 2019-06-24 2019-11-12 华为技术有限公司 A kind of image pickup method and equipment
CN110493526A (en) * 2019-09-10 2019-11-22 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Image processing method, device, equipment and medium based on more photographing modules

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115499565A (en) * 2022-08-23 2022-12-20 盯盯拍(深圳)技术股份有限公司 Image acquisition method, device and medium based on double lenses and automobile data recorder
CN115499565B (en) * 2022-08-23 2024-02-20 盯盯拍(深圳)技术股份有限公司 Image acquisition method and device based on double lenses, medium and automobile data recorder

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN112514366A (en) 2021-03-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6532217B2 (en) IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM
KR101530255B1 (en) Cctv system having auto tracking function of moving target
CN113329182A (en) Image processing method, unmanned aerial vehicle and system
WO2018205104A1 (en) Unmanned aerial vehicle capture control method, unmanned aerial vehicle capturing method, control terminal, unmanned aerial vehicle control device, and unmanned aerial vehicle
JP6716015B2 (en) Imaging control device, imaging system, and imaging control method
WO2021168804A1 (en) Image processing method, image processing apparatus and image processing system
JP2020053774A (en) Imaging apparatus and image recording method
JP2016212784A (en) Image processing apparatus and image processing method
JP2014222825A (en) Video processing apparatus and video processing method
JP7371076B2 (en) Information processing device, information processing system, information processing method and program
TWI696147B (en) Method and system for rendering a panoramic image
JP2010092092A (en) Image processing apparatus and image processing method
JP6677980B2 (en) Panorama video data processing device, processing method and processing program
JP6483661B2 (en) Imaging control apparatus, imaging control method, and program
JP2016111561A (en) Information processing device, system, information processing method, and program
CN110930303A (en) Panorama forming method and system
JP6700706B2 (en) Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program
WO2022041013A1 (en) Control method, handheld gimbal, system, and computer readable storage medium
US11790483B2 (en) Method, apparatus, and device for identifying human body and computer readable storage medium
JP2018092507A (en) Image processing apparatus, image processing method, and program
CN110647792A (en) Information processing apparatus, control method, and storage medium
WO2024018973A1 (en) Information processing method, information processing device, and information processing program
JP2020009099A (en) Image processing device, image processing method, and program
KR102497593B1 (en) Information processing device, information processing method, and storage medium
JP6852878B2 (en) Image processing equipment, image processing program and image processing method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20921454

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20921454

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1